JP6651698B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine and a slot machine, and more particularly, to a gaming machine having an accommodating portion capable of accommodating gaming balls.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, a payout device that pays out a game medium such as a game ball or a medal having a predetermined value, a storage device that has a tray that stores the game medium that is paid out by the payout device, and a storage device. There is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine provided with a discharging means for discharging a game medium accommodated in the device to the outside (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-305490 A (page 12, FIGS. 1 and 2)

  However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problem.

In other words, there is a problem that the progress of the game can be hindered when performing an operation of taking out a part of the game medium from the storage means for storing the game medium during the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and even when performing an operation of removing a part of the game medium from the storage means for storing the game medium during the game, the progress of the game is prevented. It is intended to provide a gaming machine that is difficult.

  The present invention has the following configuration to achieve such an object.

That is, the invention described in claim 1 is:
A payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value,
A first accommodating means for accommodating a game medium paid out by the paying means in a state in which the game medium can be visually recognized by a player;
A second accommodating unit provided separately from the first accommodating unit and accommodating the game medium to be paid out by the paying unit in a state that is distinguishable from the game medium accommodated in the first accommodating unit and is visible to a player; Means,
A portion of the game media to be paid out during the special game state in which the player can obtain a greater number of game medium payout opportunities than in the normal game state is guided to the second accommodation means, and the special Guiding means for guiding the remaining game media among the game media paid out during the gaming state to the first storage means.

According to the first aspect of the present invention, the progress of the game is not easily hindered even when performing an operation of removing a part of the game medium from the storage means for storing the game medium during the game .

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to the gaming machine which concerns on this invention, even when performing the operation | work which takes out some game media from the accommodating means which accommodates game media during a game, it is possible to provide a game machine which is hard to hinder the progress of a game. it can.

1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine of the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows an inner frame etc. in the state which opened the front frame set. It is a three-view figure of a lower plate, (a) is a top view, (b) is a front view, (c) is a bottom view. It is AA sectional drawing of a lower plate, (a) shows non-discharge of a 2nd discharge unit, (b) shows discharge. It is a front view showing the composition of a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a front frame set. It is a rear view showing the composition of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear configuration of the pachinko machine by disassembling main components. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of a 1st control board unit, a 2nd control board unit, and a back pack unit in a pachinko machine back surface. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame and a game board. It is a perspective view showing the back composition of an inner frame. It is a perspective view showing the back composition of a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a support fixture. FIG. 4 is a front view illustrating a configuration of a first control board unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view illustrating a configuration of a first control board unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a first control board unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view illustrating a rear configuration of the first control board unit. It is a front view showing the composition of the 2nd control board unit. It is a perspective view showing the composition of the 2nd control board unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a second control board unit. It is a front view showing the composition of a back pack unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a back pack unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a tank rail. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of a special symbol display device. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of various counters used for game control. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing by a main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a missing symbol counter. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a payout control process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows a ball lending control process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a main process performed by the discharge control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process performed by the discharge control device. It is a flowchart which shows discharge number setting processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a discharge motor driving process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an error notification process performed by the discharge control device. It is a flowchart which shows the state return process by a discharge control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge stop interruption process. FIG. 7 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process executed by a CPU of the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal process executed by a CPU of the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process performed by the audio lamp control device. It is a figure explaining the display screen of the 1st symbol display device, (a)-(c) is a figure explaining discharge number setting display with time, and (d) is a figure explaining discharge error information. It is. FIG. 9 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal process executed by a CPU of the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows a game ball firing / discharge switching process. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment. It is a figure of the lower plate of Example 4, (a) is the figure which attached the front panel, (b) is the figure which removed the front panel. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a lower plate, (a) is AA sectional drawing of the same position as FIG.5 (a), (b) shows the accommodation state of a 2nd discharge unit, (c) shows a discharge state. . It is a figure which notifies the accommodation situation of a game ball in a discharge ball accommodation space, and (a)-(e) is a figure which explains information by a 1st symbol display device with time. It is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine of Example 5. It is a back side perspective view of the inner frame for demonstrating an induction | guidance | passage unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back pack unit for explaining the guide path unit. It is a figure explaining operation of a passage change mechanism, (a) is a figure showing closure of an auxiliary tray guidance path, and (b) is opening of an auxiliary tray guidance path. FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a fifth embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process performed by the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart explaining a guidance number setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a guidance path process. It is a flowchart which shows a guidance stop interruption process. It is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine of Example 6. FIG. 13 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a sixth embodiment. It is a figure explaining operation of a passage change mechanism, (a) is a figure showing closure of an auxiliary tray guidance path, and (b) is opening of an auxiliary tray guidance path. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal process executed by a CPU of the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows a lower plate guidance passage monitoring and guidance passage process. It is a flowchart which shows an auxiliary dish guidance passage monitoring and guidance passage process. It is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine of Example 7. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set were opened for explaining a measurement unit. It is a figure explaining the weight measurement of the game ball stored in the lower plate, (a) is a BB sectional view shown in Drawing 76, (b) is a CC sectional view shown in Drawing 76, (c) FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram for explaining a distortion sensor. It is a back side perspective view of the inner frame for demonstrating an induction | guidance | passage unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the back pack unit for explaining the guide path unit. It is a figure explaining operation of a passage change mechanism, (a) shows closure of the 2nd lower plate guidance passage, and (b) shows opening of the 2nd lower plate guidance passage. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to a seventh embodiment. FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a main part of an electrical configuration according to a seventh embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process performed by the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows a lower plate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a calibration process. It is a flowchart which shows a lower plate accommodation number calculation process. It is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine of Example 8. It is a figure explaining load detection of a game ball etc. stored in a lower plate, (a) is a BB sectional view similar to Drawing 77 (a), and (b) is similar to Drawing 77 (b). It is CC sectional drawing. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating a main part of an electrical configuration according to an eighth embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process performed by the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode determination process. It is a figure explaining each big hit effect of effect patterns A to C with the passage of time. (A)-(f) is the figure which displayed the display image in the big hit effect display of the effect pattern A along with progress of time. (A)-(f) is the figure which displayed the display image in the big hit effect display of each of the effect patterns B and C along with progress of time. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process performed by the audio lamp control device according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows lower plate load detection and weight conversion processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode determination process. It is a figure explaining each chance production of production patterns A to D as time passes. (A)-(f) is the figure which displayed the display image in the chance effect display of the effect pattern A along with progress of time. FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the slot machine of Embodiment 10 with the front door closed. FIG. 44 is a front view of the slot machine of the tenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing the inside of the slot machine with the front door removed. It is a rear view of the front door 612. It is a figure explaining operation of a passage change mechanism, (a) shows closure of the 2nd payout passage, and (b) shows opening of the 2nd payout passage. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the slot machine. FIG. 34 is a block diagram illustrating a main part of an electrical configuration according to a tenth embodiment. 30 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process according to the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a medal payout process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process by a CPU. It is a flow chart which shows the guidance passage processing of a 10th embodiment. 21 is a flowchart illustrating a calibration process according to the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the 1st tray accommodation number calculation process. FIG. 39 is a schematic front view of the slot machine of the eleventh embodiment.

This specification also discloses the following inventions relating to gaming machines and problems to be solved by the inventions.
In the following embodiments, unless otherwise specified, the directions of up, down, left, right and front (or back, front) will be described with reference to a state in which the game board is viewed from the front, that is, a front view of the game board.

<First issue>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, a payout device such as a payout device that pays out a game medium such as a game ball or a medal having a predetermined value, and a tray that stores the game medium paid out by the payout device are provided. There are gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines provided with a storage means such as a storage device. (For example, JP-A-2004-305490 (page 12, FIGS. 1 and 2))
In addition, in a game hall where a gaming machine is installed, there is a game hall in which a predetermined number of game media can be exchanged for food and drink provided by the game hall, such as exchanging different drinks and snacks according to the number of game media. It is also known.
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problem.
That is, when the player intends to exchange a predetermined number of game media for food and drink, the player grabs the game media contained in the storage device by hand and transfers the game media to the container in order to transfer the game media to the clerk. In addition, an operation of scooping the game medium stored in the storage device with the container occurs.
After passing through such operations, the container is handed over to the clerk of the game arcade, but the number of the game media transferred to the container may be excessive or deficient for a predetermined number. In some cases, it may be necessary to adjust the number of game media, such as handing over the game media to a store clerk or, on the contrary, receiving excess game media from the store clerk and returning it to the storage device. When such an adjustment operation occurs, there is a problem that the player is irritated and difficult to concentrate on the game because the progress of the game is hindered.
In addition, in order to reduce such adjustment work, after roughly putting the game media in the container, another adjustment is made to increase the number of game media in the container or reduce the number of game media in the container. Work may occur. Even while performing such another adjustment operation, the player must continue to interrupt the game, so that the progress of the game is still hindered.
The invention according to the following (A0) has been made in view of such circumstances, and a gaming machine capable of facilitating the removal of a predetermined number of game media from the game media paid out to the accommodation means by the payout means. The purpose is to provide.
The invention according to (A0) below has the following configuration to achieve such an object.
(A0) a payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value;
An accommodating means for accommodating game media to be paid out by the paying means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
A first take-out unit from which an arbitrary number of game media are taken out of the game media paid out to the storage unit by the payout unit;
A gaming machine comprising: a second take-out unit that takes out a predetermined number of game media from the game media paid out to the storage unit by the payout unit.
According to the invention described in (A0), when it is desired to take out an arbitrary number of game media out of the game media paid out to the accommodating unit by the payout unit, the arbitrary number of game media can be taken out by using the first takeout unit. The game media can be taken out, but if a predetermined number of game media are to be taken out of the game media paid out to the accommodating means by the payout means, the predetermined number of game media are taken out by using the second take-out means. be able to. As described above, by taking out the game media using the second take-out means, it is possible to easily take out a predetermined number of game media from the game media paid out to the storage means by the pay-out means.

Further, the following (A1) invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of easily taking out a predetermined number of game media from a storage means for storing the game media. With the goal.
(A1) a payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value;
An accommodating means for accommodating game media to be paid out by the paying means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The storage means,
First discharging means for discharging the game medium stored in the storing means to the outside,
And a second discharging means for discharging the game medium stored in the storing means to the outside.

According to the invention described in (A1), since the storage means is provided with the two discharge means, the first discharge means and the second discharge means, two types of game media stored in the storage means are provided. Emission can be realized. That is, discharge for discharging the game medium stored in the storage means to a storage container called a dollar box or the like, and discharge for other uses. Thereby, in cases other than the case where the first discharging means is used, such as when transferring game balls to a storage container such as a dollar box, the player grabbed the game medium from the accommodation means by hand and took out the game medium. By using the two discharging means, it is possible to easily take out a predetermined number of game media from the storage means even when the first discharging means is not used.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to (A1), it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily taking out a predetermined number of game media from the accommodation means accommodating the game media.

In relation to (A0), the first discharging means is provided as the first extracting means for discharging an arbitrary number of game media out of the game media stored in the storing means to the outside. The second discharging means is provided as the second extracting means for discharging a predetermined number of game media out of the game media stored in the storage means to the outside.
With this configuration, an arbitrary number of game media among the game media accommodated in the accommodation device by using the first ejection device out of the first ejection device and the second ejection device provided in the accommodation device. Is discharged to the outside, but by using the second discharging means, a predetermined number of game media among the game media stored in the storing means are discharged to the outside. Thereby, two types of discharge can be realized for the game medium stored in the storage means. That is, a first discharge for discharging an arbitrary number of game media accommodated in the accommodating means to a storage container called a dollar box or the like, and a predetermined number of game media from the game media accommodated in the accommodating means. And the second discharge performed for a purpose other than the first discharge, such as exchange with the second discharge. As described above, since the predetermined number of game media can be discharged to the outside by using the second discharging means, it is possible to easily take out the predetermined number of game media from the game media paid out to the storage means by the payout means.

(A2) In the gaming machine according to (A1),
The first discharging unit is stored in the storage unit during a special game state in which a player can obtain a greater number of game medium payout opportunities than in a normal game state or when the player ends the game. A gaming machine characterized in that it is used for discharging a game medium to be discharged to an external container.

  According to the invention described in (A2), a special game state in which the player can obtain a greater number of game medium payout opportunities than in the normal game state, or when the player finishes the game, such as in the special game state. Even in cases other than the case where one discharging unit is used, a predetermined number of game media can be easily taken out from the storage unit for storing game media.

(A3) In the gaming machine according to (A1) or (A2),
The gaming machine, wherein the second discharging unit is provided outside the center of the accommodation unit when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  According to the invention described in (A3), when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, the second ejection unit is located outside the center of the accommodation unit, so that the player sitting on the chair in front of the gaming machine can: By naturally extending the free hand forward, the game medium discharged from the second discharging means can be easily received.

(A4) In the gaming machine described in (A3),
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the second discharging means is disposed outside the center of the accommodation means from a position where the first discharging means is disposed when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. Machine.

  According to the invention described in (A4), when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, the second discharge unit is located outside the center of the storage unit with respect to the position where the first discharge unit is disposed. Therefore, even when a storage container for storing the game medium discharged from the first discharge unit is disposed outside the first discharge unit, the storage container is discharged from the second discharge unit. It is hard to get in the way when receiving game media. Therefore, the game medium discharged from the second discharging means can be easily received.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4),
A gaming machine, wherein the second discharging means discharges a smaller number of game media than the number of game media discharged by the first discharging means.

  According to the invention described in (A5), since the number of game media discharged by the second discharge unit is smaller than the number of game media discharged by the first discharge unit, the game stored in the storage unit When taking out a predetermined number of game media from the medium, if the second ejection unit having a smaller number of ejections than the first ejection unit is used, the operation of taking out the predetermined number of game media is more difficult than using the first ejection unit. Also becomes easier.

  In addition, the first discharging means for discharging the game medium to the storage container is often configured to discharge a large amount of the game medium at a time. Therefore, it is difficult to finely adjust the number of game media discharged from the storage device using such a discharging device. Therefore, other than the case where the game medium is discharged to the storage container, for example, when the game medium is discharged to a container for exchanging food and drink, the second discharge unit having a smaller discharge number than the first discharge unit is used. Then, it becomes easy to accurately take out a predetermined amount of game media.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5),
The first discharge unit includes a first discharge unit that discharges the game medium stored in the storage unit to the outside,
The second discharge means is configured to discharge the game media stored in the storage means to the outside and to reduce the number of game media discharged per unit time than the first discharge unit. A gaming machine comprising two discharge units.

  According to the invention described in (A6), the number of game media discharged from the second discharging unit per unit time is the same as the number of game media discharged from the first discharging unit per unit time. Since it is configured to reduce the number of game media, discharging the game media from the second discharge unit is easier than discharging the game media from the first discharge unit. In addition, a predetermined number of game media can be accurately taken out.

(A7) In the gaming machine described in (A6),
A gaming machine, wherein the second discharging means includes a discharging detecting means for detecting the number of game media discharged from the second discharging portion.

  According to the invention described in (A7), since the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit is internally grasped by the discharge detection unit, the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit is desired. Can be easily detected. This makes it possible to realize a configuration that utilizes the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit that is internally grasped.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to (A7),
A gaming machine, comprising: a discharge notification unit that performs a notification that allows a player to recognize the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit, detected by the discharge detection unit.

  According to the invention described in (A8), it is easy to check the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit during the game.

(A9) In the gaming machine described in (A6),
Without using a discharge detection unit that detects the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit, the player can intuitively recognize the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit. A gaming machine comprising an intuitive discharge control means for controlling discharge of a game medium from a second discharge unit.

  According to the invention described in (A9), the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit is provided to the player without using discharge detection means for detecting the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit. Since the control for discharging the game medium from the second discharge unit is performed by the intuitive discharge control means so that the user can intuitively recognize, the second discharge is performed by detecting the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit. The number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit can be intuitively determined without requiring an additional configuration for notifying the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit. Can be recognized by the player.

(A10) In the gaming machine according to (A9),
The gaming machine, wherein the intuitive ejection control means controls the game balls to be ejected from the second ejection unit in synchronization with the ejection of the game balls from the game ball launching device.

  According to the invention described in (A10), the intuitive discharge control means controls the discharge of the game ball from the second discharge unit in synchronization with the launch of the game ball from the game ball launching device. By counting the game balls fired from the game ball firing device, the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit can be intuitively recognized.

(A11) In the gaming machine according to (A10),
Wherein the intuitive discharge control means vibrates a game ball launch operation means operated by a player to launch the game ball in synchronization with the launch of the game ball from the game ball launching device. .

  According to the invention described in (A11), intuitively, the control in which the game ball launch operation means operated by the player to launch the game ball vibrates in synchronization with the launch of the game ball from the game ball launch device is intuitively performed. Since the discharge control means performs, the player intuitively counts the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit by counting the number of vibrations of the game ball firing operation means operating for playing game balls. Can be recognized.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8),
The gaming machine, wherein the second discharging means discharges a predetermined number of game media to the outside, the number being smaller than the number of game media discharged by the first discharging means. .

  According to the invention described in (A12), when the second discharge unit discharges a part of the game media stored in the storage unit to the outside, a predetermined number of game media is discharged to the outside. . Therefore, after the game medium is discharged from the housing means to the outside, the labor for adjusting the number of game media according to the amount of the discharged game medium is reduced, so that the payout means pays out the payout medium to the housing means. The task of the player taking out a predetermined amount of game media from the stored game media is further facilitated.

(A13) In the gaming machine according to (A12),
When the discharge detecting means detects that the number of game media discharged from the second discharge portion reaches a predetermined number, the discharge of the game balls from the second discharge portion is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the invention described in (A13), when the number of game media discharged from the second discharge unit reaches a predetermined number, the discharge of game balls from the second discharge unit is stopped. In addition, it is possible to accurately discharge a predetermined number of game media.

(A14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A13),
When discharging the game medium stored in the storage unit, a discharge operation unit that receives an operation of the player,
Discharge condition determining means for determining whether or not a discharge condition is satisfied, which triggers the second discharge means to start discharging game media stored in the storage means,
The second ejection unit is configured to, when the ejection operation unit receives an operation of a player and the ejection condition determination unit determines that the ejection condition is not satisfied, play the game medium stored in the accommodation unit. If the discharge operation means receives a player's operation and the discharge condition determination means determines that the discharge condition is satisfied, the discharge of the game medium stored in the storage means is not performed. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the invention described in (A14), if the player determines in advance that the game medium stored in the storage unit is to be discharged from the second discharge unit by operating the discharge operation unit, the player can At the timing when it is determined that the specific discharge condition is satisfied, the game medium can be discharged from the second discharge section without any operation.

  The above-described “discharge condition that triggers the second payout unit to start discharging the game medium stored in the storage unit by the second discharge unit” may be, for example, during establishment of a special game state advantageous to the player. When the number of game media paid out from the payout unit reaches a predetermined number, when the number of game media stored in the storage unit reaches a predetermined number, or when a plurality of special game states are provided, a predetermined type is provided. (For example, when the maximum value that can be acquired by the player is different during the special game state, a special game state where a certain value or more is obtained) occurs. Any condition related to the game may be used.

(A15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A14),
When discharging the game medium stored in the storage unit, the storage device includes a discharge operation unit that receives an operation of a player,
The gaming machine, wherein the discharge operation means is configured to be able to change the number of game media stored in the storage means discharged by the second discharge means in accordance with an operation of a player.

  According to the invention described in (A15), the number of game media discharged by the second discharge means can be changed arbitrarily in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the number of game media and food provided by the game hall can be changed. It is possible to cope with a case where a plurality of exchanges are set according to the type of food and drink.

(A16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A15),
The storage means,
A first accommodation area capable of accommodating a game ball;
A second accommodation area capable of accommodating a game ball,
The first discharging means discharges a game ball accommodated in the first accommodation area to the outside,
The gaming machine, wherein the second discharging means discharges the game balls accommodated in the second accommodation area to the outside.

  According to the invention described in (A16), in a state where the game balls are accommodated in the second accommodation area, the game balls accommodated in the first accommodation area are ejected by the first ejection means or used for a game. The number of game balls accommodated in the second accommodation area does not change even if the game ball is moved. Therefore, even if the game is continued after the game balls are accommodated in the second accommodation area, the number of game balls accommodated in the second accommodation area does not decrease. After the game ball is stored, the game ball can be taken out of the second storage area when the hand becomes empty.

<Second task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, a payout device that pays out a game medium such as a game ball or a medal having a predetermined value, a storage device that has a tray that stores the game medium that is paid out by the payout device, and a storage device. There is a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine provided with a discharging means for discharging a game medium accommodated in the device to the outside. (For example, JP-A-2004-305490 (page 12, FIGS. 1 and 2))
In addition, in a game hall where a gaming machine is installed, there is a game hall in which a predetermined number of game media can be exchanged for food and drink provided by the game hall, such as exchanging different drinks and snacks according to the number of game media. It is also known.
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problem.
That is, when the player intends to exchange a predetermined number of game media for food and drink, the player grabs the game media contained in the accommodation device by hand and transfers the game media to the container in order to transfer the game media to the clerk. In addition, an operation of scooping the game medium stored in the storage device with the container occurs.
During such work, the game must be interrupted, so if the player wants to exchange the game media for food and drink provided by the game hall and eat or drink, the progress of the game will be hindered. You may be forced to endure eating and drinking to avoid food and drink.
The invention pertaining to the following (B1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and even when performing an operation of taking out some game media from the storage means for storing the game media during the game, the game can be performed at the same time. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that is hardly hindered from progressing.
The invention according to (B1) below has the following configuration to achieve such an object.

(B1) a payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value;
First accommodation means for accommodating game media paid out by the payout means;
Second storage means for storing the game medium to be paid out by the payout means,
A portion of the game media to be paid out during the special game state in which the player can obtain a greater number of game medium payout opportunities than in the normal game state is guided to the second accommodation means, and the special A guiding means for guiding remaining game media among the game media paid out during the gaming state to the first storage means.

  According to the invention described in (B1), some of the game media to be paid out during the special game state are guided to the second storage means. The remaining game media except for some of the game media described above are guided to the first storage means. Therefore, when it is desired to take out some game balls from the game media paid out during the special game state, it is necessary to separate out some game media from the game media stored in the first storage means. Instead, it is only necessary to take out the game media paid out to the second storage means. As a result, during the game, the operation of removing some of the game media from the accommodating means for accommodating the game media is unlikely to hinder the progress of the game, so that the player can enjoy the food and You can exchange food and drink.

  Each of the first housing means and the second housing means may be constituted by a plurality of accommodation sections, or each or any one may be constituted by a single accommodation section.

Note that, in relation to the gaming machine described in (A0), the guide means is provided during the special gaming state in which the player can obtain a greater number of gaming medium payout opportunities than in the normal gaming state. Guiding the predetermined number of game media out of the game media paid out in a predetermined direction, and excluding the predetermined number of game media out of the game media paid out by the payout means during the special game state. The storage means is provided as means for guiding in a direction different from a predetermined direction, and the storage means includes a first storage means for storing the remaining game media guided in the different direction by the guidance means, as the first extraction means. And a second accommodating means for accommodating the predetermined number of game media guided in the predetermined direction by the guiding means is provided as the second extracting means.
With this configuration, the remaining game media excluding the predetermined number of game media out of the game media paid out during the special game state are guided to the first storage device and stored in the first storage device. However, a predetermined number of game media out of the game media paid out during the special game state are guided to the second storage means and stored in the second storage means. Therefore, when it is desired to take out a predetermined number of game media from the game media paid out during the special game state, it is necessary to separate out a predetermined number of game media from the game media stored in the first storage means. Instead, it is only necessary to take out a predetermined number of game media to be paid out to the second storage means. As described above, since a predetermined number of game media can be taken out by taking out the game media from the second storage means, it is easy to take out a predetermined number of game media from the game media paid out to the storage means by the payout means. it can.
Also, after the predetermined number of game media is guided to the second storage means by the guiding means, the predetermined number of game media is stored in the second storage means. Can be. Therefore, the operation of taking out a predetermined number of game media does not easily hinder the progress of the game.

(B2) In the gaming machine according to (B1),
A gaming machine main body having various gaming means including the payout means,
The first accommodating means is provided in a first accommodating device disposed on a front surface of the gaming machine main body,
The second storage means is provided in a second storage device disposed at a position different from the position at which the first storage device is disposed on the front surface of the game machine main body in a horizontal direction. Machine.

  According to the invention described in (B2), the first storage means and the second storage means are disposed at different positions in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the game machine main body. Thus, even during a period in which some manual work is required, it is easy to move the hand smoothly from the first storage device to the second storage device and take out the game ball from the second storage device.

(B3) In the gaming machine according to (B1),
A gaming machine main body having various gaming means including the payout means,
The gaming machine, wherein the first accommodating means and the second accommodating means are provided side by side in a single accommodating device arranged on a front surface of the gaming machine main body in a state where they are separated from each other.

  According to the invention described in (B3), the first storage means and the second storage means are provided in one storage device adjacent to each other in a state where they are separated from each other. Even when two accommodation means are provided, they can be arranged on the front surface of the gaming machine main body in a space-saving manner.

(B4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
The guide unit guides the predetermined number of game media among the game media paid out during the special game state to the second storage unit when a predetermined guide destination switching condition other than an operation of a player is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the invention described in (B4), when a predetermined guide destination switching condition excluding a player's operation is satisfied, a predetermined number of game media out of game media paid out during the special game state are stored in the second storage medium. Guided by means. Therefore, the player can switch the payout destination of the game medium to be paid out during the special game state without performing the operation when the predetermined guide destination switching condition excluding the player's operation is satisfied. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the operation labor required for switching the payout destination of the game medium. Note that the predetermined guidance destination switching condition excluding the operation of the player is a condition under which the guidance destination can be automatically switched if the predetermined condition is satisfied without the operation of the player.

(B5) In the gaming machine described in (B4),
When the predetermined guide destination return condition is satisfied after the predetermined guide destination switching condition is satisfied, the guide means stores the remaining game media among the game media paid out during the special game state in the first storage means. A gaming machine characterized by being guided to

  According to the invention described in (B5), when the predetermined guide destination return condition is satisfied after the predetermined guide destination switching condition is satisfied, the remaining game media out of the game media paid out during the special game state are used. It is guided to the first storage means. Therefore, when the predetermined guide destination return condition is satisfied, the player can return the guide destination of the remaining game media among the game media paid out during the special game state to the first storage means. Note that the case where the predetermined guide destination return condition is satisfied may be an operation of the player, or may be an operation other than the operation of the player.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3),
Guidance operation means for receiving an operation of a player for guiding a game medium to the second storage means,
When the guidance operation means does not receive the operation of the player, the guidance means guides the game medium paid out during the special game state to the first accommodation means, and the guidance operation means controls the operation of the player. When receiving, the predetermined number of game media among the game media to be paid out during the special game state are guided to the second accommodation means, and the remaining game media among the game media to be paid out during the special game state. To the first accommodating means.

  According to the invention described in (B6), when the player wants to store the game medium paid out during the special game state, the player can guide the game medium to the first storage means. In addition, when the player wants to exchange the game medium paid out during the special game state with food and drink provided by the game hall and eat and drink, the player simply operates the guidance operation means and enters the game in the second accommodation means. The medium can be guided. Therefore, the player can guide the game medium to the second accommodating means at a desired timing.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to (B6),
The guidance means includes guidance condition determination means for determining whether or not a guidance condition for triggering a game medium to the second storage means is satisfied,
The guide means guides a game medium to the first storage means when the guide operation means receives a player's operation and the guide condition determination means determines that the guide condition is not satisfied. If the guidance operation means receives a player's operation and the guidance condition determination means determines that the payout condition is satisfied, the guidance medium is guided to the second storage means. A gaming machine.

  According to the invention described in (B7), if the player determines in advance that the guidance means will guide the game medium to the second storage means by operating the guidance operation means, the player will be able to perform the guidance conditions. Is determined to hold, the game medium can be guided to the second payout means without any operation.

  The above-mentioned "guidance condition that triggers the guidance medium to guide the game medium to the second storage means" is, for example, that the payout means pays out to the first storage means during establishment of a special game state advantageous to the player. When the number of game media reaches a predetermined number, when the number of game media stored in the first storage means reaches a predetermined number, or when a plurality of types of special game states are provided, a predetermined type of special game is provided. A state occurs (for example, a special game state in which a certain value or more is obtained when the maximum value that can be obtained by the player is different during the special game state) or a setting by the player Any condition related to a certain game, such as occurrence of a special game state of a certain type, may be used.

(B8) In the gaming machine according to (B4) or (B5),
The guidance operation means is configured to be capable of changing the number of the predetermined number of game media that the guidance means guides to the second storage means during the special game state according to an operation of a player. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the invention described in (B8), the number of game media guided to the second storage means can be arbitrarily changed according to the operation of the player. It is possible to cope with a case where a plurality of exchanges are set according to the type of food and drink.

(B9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B8),
The guiding means,
A first guide path for guiding game media paid out from the payout means to the first storage means;
A second guide path for guiding game media paid out from the payout means to the second storage means;
A switching unit that switches a guide destination of the game medium paid out from the payout unit between the first guide unit and the second guide unit,
The guide unit is configured to store the predetermined number of game media among the game media paid out during the special game state when the switching unit is switching the guide destination of the game media to the second guide unit, in the second storage unit. Means, and when the switching unit switches the guide destination of the game medium to the first guide unit, the remaining game media among the game media paid out during the special game state are stored in the first storage unit. A gaming machine characterized by being guided to

  According to the invention described in (B9), the guide destination of the game medium paid out from the payout means can be switched to the first storage means or the second storage means, so that the above-described invention can be suitably realized.

<Third task>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a game machine of this type, for example, a payout device that pays out game media such as game balls or medals having a predetermined value, and a storage device that has a tray or the like that stores the game media paid out by the payout device are provided. There is a game machine. (For example, JP-A-2004-305490 (page 12, FIGS. 1 and 2))
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problem.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when the player attempts to count the game media stored in the housing device during the game, or when the game machine body is stored in the housing device during the game, When trying to grasp the number, there is a problem that it is difficult to accurately determine how many game media are stored in the storage device.
The invention according to the following (C1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and a game in which it is easy to accurately grasp the number of game media stored in a storage device even during a game. The purpose is to provide a machine.
The invention according to (C1) below has the following configuration to achieve such an object.

(C1) a payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value;
An accommodating means for accommodating game media to be paid out by the paying means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Measuring means for measuring the weight of the game medium accommodated in the accommodation means,
Acquiring means for acquiring weight information corresponding to the weight of one game medium, using game media paid out by the payout means and accommodated by the accommodation means;
A conversion unit configured to convert the weight of the game medium stored in the storage unit into the number of game media stored in the storage unit based on the weight information acquired by the acquisition unit. A gaming machine.

  According to the invention described in (C1), when obtaining the weight information corresponding to the weight of one game medium, the game medium paid out by the payout means and stored in the storage means is used. Weight information used for conversion from weight to the number of game media is easily obtained. Based on the obtained weight information, the weight of the game media stored in the storage unit is converted into the number of game media stored in the storage unit, so that the number of game media stored in the storage device is accurate. Required. Therefore, even during the game, it is easy to accurately grasp the number of game media stored in the storage device.

Also, even if the weight of one game medium changes during the period when the gaming machine is installed,
Since the weight information used for converting the weight of game media into the number of game media reflects the weight of one game medium with respect to the game media actually paid out from the payout device and stored in the storage means, , It is possible to keep track of the exact number of game media.

(C2) In the gaming machine according to (C1),
The obtaining means obtains an average weight indicating an average weight of one game medium as the weight information based on a weight obtained by measuring the game medium paid out by the paying means by the measuring means. So,
The conversion unit converts the weight of the game medium stored in the storage unit into the number of game media stored in the storage unit based on the average weight acquired by the acquisition unit. Gaming machine to do.

  According to the invention described in (C2), the weight information corresponding to the weight of one game medium is obtained based on the weight obtained by measuring the game medium paid out by the payout means by the measurement means. It is obtained as an average weight indicating the average weight. Based on the average weight, the weight of the game medium stored in the storage unit is converted into the number of game media stored in the storage unit. Therefore, even if there is a variation in the weight between the weight of some game media paid out by the payout means and the weight of other game media, it is possible to keep track of the exact number of game media.

(C3) In the gaming machine according to (C1) or (C2),
In the special game state in which the game medium is paid out more than in the normal game state, the acquisition unit uses the game medium paid out by the payout unit and stored in the storage unit, and A gaming machine characterized by acquiring information.

  According to the invention described in (C3), in the special game state in which a large amount of game media are paid out at one time, the weight information corresponding to the weight of one game medium is obtained. The accuracy of the weight information can be improved as much as the information can be obtained.

(C4) In the gaming machine according to (C1),
The storage means,
First accommodation means for accommodating game media paid out by the payout means;
A second accommodating means for accommodating the game medium paid out by the paying means,
The measuring means comprises:
First measuring means for measuring the weight of the game medium stored in the first storing means;
And a second measuring means for measuring the weight of the game medium stored in the second storing means,
The acquisition means acquires the weight information by using a game medium paid out to the second storage means by the payout means,
The conversion unit converts the weight of the game medium stored in the first storage unit into the number of game media stored in the first storage unit based on the weight information acquired by the acquisition unit. A gaming machine characterized by the above.

  According to the invention described in (C4), the weight information used when the conversion unit converts the weight of the game medium stored in the first storage unit into the number of game media is stored separately from the first storage unit. Since it is obtained using the game medium paid out to the means (the second storage means), even if it is difficult to obtain the weight information using the game medium paid out to the first storage means, the second information is obtained. A storage means is available for obtaining weight information. Therefore, even when it is difficult to obtain the weight information using the game medium paid out to the first storage unit, the number of game media paid out to the first storage unit can be accurately obtained.

(C5) In the gaming machine according to (C4),
The acquisition unit acquires, as the weight information, an average weight indicating an average weight of one game medium based on a weight obtained by measuring the game medium paid out by the payout unit with the second measuring unit. To do
The conversion unit converts the weight of the game medium stored in the first storage unit into the number of game media stored in the first storage unit based on the average weight acquired by the acquisition unit. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the invention described in (C5), the weight information corresponding to the weight of one game medium indicates an average weight of one game medium based on the weight obtained by the measurement by the second measuring unit. Obtained as average weight. Based on the average weight, the weight of the game medium stored in the first storage unit is converted into the number of game media stored in the first storage unit. Therefore, despite the variation in weight between the weight of some game media paid out by the payout means and the weight of other game media, the weight information is obtained using the game medium paid out to the first storage means. Even if it is difficult to obtain the number of game media, it is possible to keep track of the exact number of game media.

(C6) In the gaming machine according to (C4) or (C5), the acquisition unit is paid out by the payout unit in a special game state in which a chance of paying out game media is obtained more than in a normal game state; A gaming machine, wherein the weight information is obtained by using a game medium stored in the second storage means.

  According to the invention described in (C6), when it is difficult to obtain the weight information using the game medium paid out to the first storage means, the weight information is used using the game medium paid out to the second storage means. In the special game state in which a large amount of game media are paid out at one time, the weight information can be obtained from a large number of game media, so that the accuracy of the weight information can be improved.

(C7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C6),
A game machine comprising a display unit for displaying the number of game media converted by the conversion unit.

  According to the invention described in (C7), the number of game media converted by the conversion unit is displayed on the display unit, so that the player can display the game media without confirming the game media stored in the storage device. Just by watching the number of game media displayed on the means, it becomes easy to accurately grasp the number of game media stored in the storage device even during the game.

(C8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (C1) to (C6),
A gaming machine comprising: an effect execution unit that executes an effect according to the number of game media converted by the conversion unit.

  According to the invention described in (C8), since the number of game media stored in the storage device is accurately determined, an effect that accurately reflects the number of game media stored in the storage device is provided. Can be performed.

<Fourth assignment>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a game machine of this type, for example, a payout device that pays out game media such as game balls or medals having a predetermined value, and a storage device that has a tray or the like that stores the game media paid out by the payout device are provided. There is a game machine. (For example, JP-A-2004-305490 (page 12, FIGS. 1 and 2))
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problem.
That is, some conventional gaming machines execute a predetermined effect that is executed in a manner recognized by a player, such as a display effect displayed on a liquid crystal display device or a lighting effect for lighting an accessory lamp. It is difficult to determine whether these predetermined effects are suitable for a player who is actually recognizing the predetermined effect. For this reason, there is a problem that it is difficult to further enhance the amusement of the effect performed in a manner recognized by the player.
The invention according to (D1) below has been made in view of such circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by a player. The purpose is to do.
The invention according to (D1) below has the following configuration to achieve such an object.

(D1) a payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value;
An accommodating means for accommodating game media to be paid out by the paying means,
Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect in a manner recognized by the player,
Control means for performing control related to the game including control for executing the predetermined effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
A load detecting unit that detects a load externally added to the storage unit,
The control unit is configured to execute the predetermined effect performed by the effect execution unit based on load information based on a load detected by the load detection unit and reference information serving as a reference when comparing with the load information. A gaming machine comprising: an effect mode determining means for determining the mode.

  According to the invention described in (D1), the load externally applied to the storage unit is detected by the load detection unit, and the load information based on the load detected by the load detection unit is compared with the load information. Based on the reference information serving as a reference, a predetermined effect form to be executed by the effect executing means is determined by the effect state determining means. The load externally applied to the storage means is, for example, the load of the game medium stored in the storage means, the load of the player's hand placed on the storage means, or the like. For example, by detecting the load of the game medium accommodated in the accommodation means, the player tends to store the game medium in the accommodation means, or tends to discharge the game medium immediately without storing the game medium in the accommodation means. Information on the tendency of the player, such as whether the player is a player, can be obtained as load information. Further, for example, by detecting the load of the player's hand placed on the accommodation means, information on the degree of interest of the player in a predetermined effect can be obtained as load information. Thereby, by appropriately setting the reference information as a reference when comparing with the load information, the predetermined effect mode executed by the effect executing means based on the load information and the reference information is suitable for the player. It is determined so that it becomes the aspect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player.

(D2) In the gaming machine according to (D1),
The load information is game medium load information indicating a load of the game medium stored in the storage unit,
The reference information is game medium reference load information indicating a load of the game medium serving as a reference when compared with the game medium load information,
The gaming machine, wherein the game mode determining unit determines the mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing unit based on the game medium load information and the game medium reference load information.

  According to the invention described in (D2), the load information described above is game medium load information indicating the load of the game medium stored in the storage unit. The above-described reference information is game medium reference load information indicating the load of the game medium as a reference when compared with the game medium load information. The mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means is determined based on the game medium load information and the game medium reference load information. As a result, the predetermined effect mode determined by the game mode determination unit is a player who tends to store the game medium in the storage unit, or tends to discharge the game medium immediately without storing the game medium in the storage unit. A mode in which the tendency of the player of the player, which is grasped from the tendency of the player to store the game medium in the storage means, such as the player, may be adopted. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D3) In the gaming machine according to (D2),
The control means executes the predetermined effect in a special game state in which a player can obtain a greater number of game medium payout opportunities than in a normal game state,
The storage unit includes a discharge operation unit that receives an operation of a player for discharging a game medium to the outside of the storage unit,
In the special game state, during the period in which the game medium is paid out to the storage means, the discharge operation unit receives an operation of the player, and the storage means discharges the game medium to the outside in the special game state. Information indicating a discharge state determination criterion indicating whether or not the discharge state is easy,
The effect mode determining means, when the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion, and when the load information is equal to the discharge state determination criterion or when the load information is below the discharge state determination criterion, A gaming machine wherein the mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means is different.

  According to the invention described in (D3), during the period in which the game medium is paid out to the storage unit in the special game state, the discharge operation unit receives the operation of the player, and the storage unit performs the game. This is game medium reference load information indicating a discharge state determination criterion indicating whether or not the medium is in a discharge state in which the medium is easily discharged to the outside. The predetermined effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means differs depending on whether the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion or when the load information is equal to or lower than the discharge state determination criterion. Accordingly, the predetermined effect mode determined by the game mode determining means is such that the storing means discharges the game medium to the outside by operating the discharge operation unit during a period in which the game medium is paid out to the storing means in the special game state. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the tendency of the player, which is grasped from the tendency of discharging the game medium stored in the storage means, whether or not the player is easy to make a discharge state that is easy to make, is reflected. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D4) In the gaming machine according to (D3),
The effect mode determining means may be configured such that the load information is equal to the discharge state determination criterion or the load information is less than a case where the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion and thus the discharge state is not determined. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the state is determined to be the discharge state by falling below the discharge state determination criterion, the predetermined effect having a shorter time from the start to the end of the predetermined effect is determined. .

  According to the invention described in (D4), the load information is equal to the discharge state determination criterion or the load information is in the discharge state, as compared with the case where the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion and the discharge state is not determined. In the case where the state is determined to be the discharge state by falling below the determination criterion, the predetermined effect in which the time from the start to the end of the predetermined effect is shorter is determined by the effect mode determining means. In the former case, it can be determined that the player has a tendency to store game media in the accommodation means. In the latter case, it can be determined that the player has a tendency to immediately discharge the game medium without storing it in the accommodation means. Players in the latter case tend to be less willing to spend extra time, such as operating the discharge operation unit while worrying about the state of storage of the storage means during the jackpot state, than players in the former case. is there. Therefore, in the latter case, the predetermined effect in which the time from the start to the end of the predetermined effect is shorter is more easily determined in the latter case, so that the predetermined effect reflects the tendency of the player. It can be. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D5) In the gaming machine according to (D3),
An operation unit receiving an operation of a player when the predetermined effect is performed,
The effect mode determining means may be configured such that the load information is equal to the discharge state determination criterion or the load information is less than a case where the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion and thus the discharge state is not determined. When the discharge state is determined to be lower than the discharge state determination criterion, the predetermined effect in which the number of appearances of the operation request for operating the operation means is smaller is determined. Machine.

  According to the invention described in (D5), the load information is equal to the discharge state determination criterion or the load information is in the discharge state, as compared with the case where the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion and the discharge state is not determined. In the case where the discharge state is determined by falling below the determination criterion, the predetermined effect in which the number of occurrences of the operation request for operating the operation means is smaller is determined by the effect mode determination means. Players in the latter case tend to be less willing to spend extra time, such as operating the discharge operation unit while worrying about the state of storage of the storage means during the jackpot state, than players in the former case. is there. Therefore, in the latter case, the player may not like the effect in which the number of appearances of the operation request for operating the operation means is too large. Therefore, in the latter case, the predetermined effect in which the number of appearances of the operation request for operating the operation means is smaller is more easily determined in the latter case, so that the predetermined effect reflects the tendency of the player. It can be an embodiment. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D6) In the gaming machine according to (D2),
The control means executes the predetermined effect in a special game state in which a player can obtain a greater number of game medium payout opportunities than in a normal game state,
The storage unit includes a discharge operation unit that receives an operation of a player for discharging a game medium to the outside of the storage unit,
The game medium reference load information is in a caution state in which the game medium accommodated in the accommodation unit is almost full when the game medium is paid out to the accommodation unit in the special game state. Information indicating a full attention criterion indicating that
The effect mode determining means may determine whether the load information is higher than the full attention criterion, or if the load information is equal to the full attention criterion, or if the load information is lower than the full attention criterion. A gaming machine characterized by having different production modes.

  According to the invention described in (D6), the above-mentioned game medium reference load information indicates that the game medium accommodated in the accommodation unit becomes full when the game medium is paid out to the accommodation unit in the special game state. Information indicating a full attention criterion indicating that a near full attention state is set. The predetermined effect determined by the effect mode determining means differs depending on whether the load information exceeds the full attention standard or when the load information is equal to the full attention standard or when the load information is lower than the full attention standard. Thereby, the predetermined effect mode determined by the game mode determining means is such that the game medium accommodated in the accommodation means is almost full during the period in which the game medium is paid out to the accommodation means in the special game state. It is possible to adopt a mode that reflects the tendency of the player, which is grasped from the tendency when accommodating the game medium in the accommodating means, as to whether or not the player is easy to make a caution state. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D7) a payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value;
An accommodating means for accommodating game media to be paid out by the paying means,
Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect in a manner recognized by the player,
Control means for performing control related to the game including control for executing the predetermined effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
Load detection means for detecting a load externally applied to the storage means,
Operation means for receiving an operation of a player when the predetermined effect is performed;
Operation detection means for detecting a player's operation on the operation means,
The control means is configured to execute the predetermined execution performed by the effect execution means based on load information based on a load detected by the load detection means and operation information on a player's operation detected by the operation detection means. A gaming machine comprising: an effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode of the game.

  According to the invention described in (D7), the load externally applied to the storage unit is detected by the load detection unit, and the load information based on the load detected by the load detection unit and the operation detection unit. Based on the operation information relating to the operation of the player, a predetermined effect mode to be executed by the effect execution means is determined by the effect mode determination means. The load externally applied to the storage means is, for example, the load of the game medium stored in the storage means, the load of the player's hand placed on the storage means, or the like. For example, by detecting the load of the game medium accommodated in the accommodation means, the player tends to store the game medium in the accommodation means, or tends to discharge the game medium immediately without storing the game medium in the accommodation means. Information on the tendency of the player, such as whether the player is a player, can be obtained as load information. Further, for example, by detecting the load of the player's hand placed on the accommodation means, information on the degree of interest of the player in a predetermined effect can be obtained as load information. If the predetermined effect mode executed by the effect effecting means is determined based on the load information obtained in this way and the operation information on the operation of the player detected by the operation detecting means, it is suitable for the player. The predetermined effect of the mode is determined by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player.

(D8) In the gaming machine according to (D7),
The load information is hand load information indicating the load of the player's hand placed on the storage means,
The reference information is operation detection information indicating whether or not the operation of the player has been detected by the operation detection unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the game mode determination unit determines the mode of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution unit based on the hand load information and the operation detection information.

  According to the invention described in (D8), the above-mentioned reference information is operation detection information indicating whether or not the operation of the player has been detected by the operation detecting means. The predetermined effect determined by the game mode determining means is determined based on hand load information and operation detection information. Thus, the predetermined effect mode determined by the game mode determining means can be a mode reflecting the level of interest of the player in the game. Therefore, since the predetermined effect reflects the level of interest of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D9) In the gaming machine according to (D8),
The game mode determination unit is executed by the effect execution unit when the hand load information is present and the operation detection information is present, and when the hand load information is present and the operation detection information is not present. A gaming machine, wherein the mode of the predetermined effect is different.

  According to the invention described in (D9), the predetermined effect determined by the game mode determination means includes a case where there is hand load information and operation detection information, and a case where there is hand load information and operation detection information. It is different from the case without. When there is hand load information and operation detection information, there is a tendency that the player has a high interest in a predetermined effect, such as waiting for the timing of operating the operation unit with the hand placed on the storage unit. . When there is hand load information and no operation detection information, there is a tendency that the player is less interested in a predetermined effect as compared to the former case. This makes it possible to adopt a mode in which the level of interest of the player in the predetermined effect is reflected. Therefore, since the predetermined effect reflects the level of interest of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D10) In the gaming machine according to (D9),
The game mode determining means may start the predetermined effect when the hand load information is present and the operation detection information is present, compared to when the hand load information is present and the operation detection information is not present. A gaming machine, wherein the predetermined effect having a long time from the end to the end is determined.

  According to the invention described in (D10), the presence of the hand load information and the operation detection information is more effective from the start of the predetermined effect than the case of the presence of the hand load information and the absence of the operation detection information. A predetermined effect with a long time until the end is determined by the game mode determining means. The latter case tends to be a player who is more interested in the predetermined effect than the former case. For this reason, in the latter case, the predetermined effect in which the time from the start to the end of the predetermined effect is shorter is more easily determined in the latter case, thereby reflecting the player's interest in the predetermined effect. It can be set as the embodiment made. Therefore, since the predetermined effect reflects the level of interest of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D11) In the gaming machine according to (D10),
The game mode determination means, when there is load information of the hand and there is the operation detection information, than when there is the load information of the hand and there is no operation detection information, the operation of the operation means A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effect having a large number of appearances of a required operation request is determined.

  According to the invention described in (D11), the operation of the operation means is more demanded when there is hand load information and operation detection information than when there is hand load information and there is no operation detection information. A predetermined effect with a large number of occurrences of the operation request is determined by the game mode determining means. The latter case tends to be a player who is more interested in the predetermined effect than the former case. Therefore, in the latter case, the player's interest in the predetermined effect is reflected in the latter case by making it easier to determine the predetermined effect in which the number of appearances of the operation request for operating the operation means is smaller, in the latter case. It can be an embodiment. Therefore, since the predetermined effect reflects the level of interest of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

(D12) a payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value;
An accommodating means for accommodating game media to be paid out by the paying means,
Effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect in a manner recognized by the player,
Control means for performing control related to the game including control for executing the predetermined effect,
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means is changed by the operation of the player into a storage state in which the game balls are easily stored and a discharge state in which the game balls are easily discharged to the outside,
The control means includes:
An effect mode determination unit that determines an aspect of the predetermined effect executed by the effect execution unit based on whether the housing unit is in the housed state or the discharge state. Gaming machine.

  According to the invention described in (D12), the accommodation means changes, by the operation of the player, into an accommodation state in which game balls are easily accommodated and an ejection state in which game balls are easily ejected to the outside. The predetermined effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means is determined based on whether the housing means is in the housed state or the discharged state. When the accommodating means is set in an accommodating state in which the player can easily accommodate the game ball by the operation of the player, it is understood that the player tends to store the game medium in the accommodating means. When the accommodating means is set in a discharge state in which the player easily ejects the game ball by the operation of the player, it is understood that the player tends to immediately discharge the game medium without storing the game medium in the accommodating means. As described above, based on whether the storage unit is in the storage state or the discharge state, the predetermined effect mode executed by the effect execution unit is determined to be a mode suitable for the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10A, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a state in which an inner frame 12 and a front frame set 14 are opened with respect to an outer frame 11. However, FIG. 2 shows a state where the lower plate unit 13 is removed from the inner frame 12 for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the pachinko machine 10A includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10A, and an inner frame 12 supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. . Hereinafter, the configurations of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 will be individually described in detail.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a rectangular shape as a whole by a wooden plate material, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a small screw. In the present embodiment, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 in the vertical direction is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left-right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may be made of resin or light metal such as aluminum.

  The opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set so as to extend up and down on the opposite side (left side of the pachinko machine 10A in FIG. 1) from the front of the pachinko machine 10A where the handle (the game ball firing handle 18 described later) is installed. With this opening / closing axis as the axis, the inner frame 12 can be sufficiently opened forward. For example, assuming that the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is in the vertical direction on the handle installation side (the right side of the pachinko machine 10A in FIG. 1), when the inner frame 12 is opened, the head of the game ball firing handle 18 and the like are adjacent. Therefore, the inner frame 12 cannot be sufficiently opened. The inner frame 12 is made of a synthetic resin, specifically, an ABS (acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene) resin. By doing so, the material has high viscosity and can be resistant to impact, and can be manufactured at low cost.

  The configuration of the inner frame 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the front frame set 14 is removed from the pachinko machine 10A (however, in FIG. 3, for convenience, a configuration in a game area on the game board 30 is shown as a blank).

  The inner frame 12 can be roughly divided into a lower plate unit 13 attached to the lowermost portion thereof and an opening / closing opening / closing centered on a vertical opening / closing axis on the left side of the inner frame 12 in a range above the lower plate unit 13. The front frame set 14 is freely attached, a resin base 20 described later, and a game board 30 attached to the rear side of the resin base 20. Each of these components will be described in detail below.

  The lower plate unit 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 by fasteners such as screws. On the front side of the lower plate unit 13, a lower plate 15, a ball pulling lever 17, a game ball firing handle 18, an ashtray 22, and a sound output port 24 are provided. The lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided substantially at the center of the lower plate unit 13 so that game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower plate 15. The ball removing lever 17 is for removing game balls in the lower plate 15. By moving the ball removing lever 17 to the left in FIG. 1, a predetermined portion of the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 is opened, The game balls stored in the plate 15 can be pulled out downward in the downward direction through the opening on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15. The game ball firing handle 18 is disposed so as to protrude toward the near side on the right side of the lower plate 15. In response to the operation of the game ball firing handle 18 by the player, the game ball is driven by the game ball firing device 38 toward the game board 30 described later. The game ball launching device 38 includes the game ball launching handle 18, a set handle 228 described later, a launching motor 229 (see FIG. 8), and the like. The sound output port 24 is an output port for outputting a sound from a speaker 25 provided on the back of the lower plate unit 13. The ashtray 22 is provided to the left of the lower plate 15. The right side of the ashtray 22 is cantilevered by the lower plate 15 so that the ashtray 22 rotates around the axis in the left-right direction (horizontal direction) (for example, turns forward toward the front side).

  Here, the lower plate 15 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 4A and 4B are three views of the lower plate 15, wherein FIG. 4A is a plan view, FIG. 4B is a front view, and FIG. 4C is a bottom view.

  The lower plate 15 includes a first discharge unit 411 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside, and a game ball that is discharged by the first discharge unit 411 among the game balls stored in the lower plate 15. A second discharging unit 421 for discharging a smaller number of game balls to the outside. That is, the lower plate 15 uses the second discharge unit 421 to discharge the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 to the outside, rather than using the first discharge unit 411. It is configured such that the number of game balls to be discharged is reduced.

  Here, in the case of a general pachinko machine, a discharge port including a discharge port for discharging game balls stored in a lower plate into a storage container called a dollar box and a ball release lever for opening and closing the discharge port. Often, only one unit is provided. Such a discharge unit discharges a large amount of game balls at a time. Therefore, it is difficult to finely adjust the number of game balls discharged from the lower plate using such a discharge unit. In this regard, if the first discharge unit 411 and the second discharge unit 421 are provided and each of them is configured to have a difference in the number of game balls to be discharged, the first discharge unit 411 and the second discharge unit 421 can be discharged to the storage container at one time. When using one discharge unit 411 and want to finely adjust the number of game balls to be discharged, for example, when discharging game balls to a container for exchanging food and drink, the number of discharges is smaller than that of the first discharge unit 411. Fewer second discharge units 421 can be used. The use of the second discharge unit 421 makes it easier to take out a predetermined amount of game balls than grasping the game balls by hand, and the predetermined amount of game balls is used more than using the first discharge unit 411. Game balls can be taken out accurately.

  The first discharge unit 411 is provided on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 and discharges game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 to the outside (first discharge ports 412a and 412b (hereinafter collectively referred to as first discharge ports 412). ) And a first opening / closing mechanism 413 that opens or closes the first discharge port 412. The second discharge unit 421 is drilled at a position near the left end of the bottom surface of the lower plate 15, discharges the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 to the outside, and is more per unit time than the first discharge port 412. Second discharge ports 422a and 422b (hereinafter, collectively referred to as second discharge ports 422) configured to reduce the number of game balls discharged, and a second discharge port 422 that opens or closes the second discharge ports 422. And two opening / closing mechanisms 423. In addition, the lower plate 15 is provided with a recess 426 that is formed on the outer wall of the lower plate 15 so that the vicinity of the second discharge port 422b is recessed from the outside toward the inside.

  With this configuration, when the player moves the vacant left hand to the recess 426 while operating the game ball firing handle 18 with the right hand, the player removes the game ball from the second discharge unit 421. Since the game balls are taken out, the game balls can be taken out smoothly even during the operation of the game launch. Since the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422 per unit time is smaller than the number of game balls discharged from the first discharge port 412 per unit time, the first discharge port 412 It is easier to take out a predetermined number of game balls by discharging the game balls from the second outlet 422 than by discharging the game balls from the player, and to accurately output the predetermined number of game balls. Can be taken out. Further, the recess 426 in the outer wall near the second outlet 422b makes it easier for the player to bring a hand or a container for receiving the game ball to the vicinity of the second outlet 422b, thereby easily taking out the game ball. be able to.

  With reference to FIG. 5, the internal configuration of lower plate 15 will be described. 5A and 5B are cross-sectional views of the lower plate 15 taken along the line AA. FIG. 5A illustrates non-discharge of the second discharge unit 421 and FIG.

  First, the internal configuration of the lower plate 15 will be described. The lower plate 15 is roughly divided into a ball storage layer 401 that stores game balls paid out to the lower plate 15 and a game ball that is located below the ball storage layer 401 and flows out of the ball storage layer 401 to the outside. It is composed of two layers, a discharge layer 403 for discharging.

  The first discharge port 412 and the second discharge port 422 are formed in the bottom surfaces of the ball storage layer 401 and the discharge layer 403, respectively. The first discharge ports 412 formed in the ball storage layer 401 and the discharge layer 403 are referred to as first discharge ports 412a and 412b in order from the top. The second discharge ports 422 formed in the ball storage layer 401 and the discharge layer 403 are referred to as second discharge ports 422a and 422b in order from the top. Between the first outlets 412a and 412b and between the second outlets 422a and 422b, passages for flowing the game balls are formed.

  Next, the internal configuration of the first opening / closing mechanism 413 will be described. The first opening / closing mechanism 413 includes a thin plate-shaped first opening / closing member 414 having an opening through which a game ball can pass, and an outer wall surface of the lower plate 15 attached to the first opening / closing member 414. And a coil spring 415, one end of which is fixed to the first opening / closing member 414. The coil spring 415 urges the first opening / closing member 414 in a direction in which the first opening / closing member 414 closes the first discharge port 412a (to the right in this embodiment). When the ball releasing lever 17 is slid in a direction (left direction in the present embodiment) that causes the first opening / closing member 414 to open the first discharge port 412a, the opening of the first opening / closing member 414 is moved to the first discharge port 412a. An open state for communication is generated.

  Next, the internal configuration of the second opening / closing mechanism 423 will be described. The second opening / closing mechanism 423 includes a flat second opening / closing member 424 and a solenoid 425 that moves the second opening / closing member 424 between a closed position for closing the second discharge port 422a and an open position for opening the second discharge port 422a. It is configured. The solenoid 425 has a plunger connected to the second opening / closing member 424, and is fixed to the bottom surface of the housing layer 401. The solenoid 425 positions the second opening / closing member 424 in the closed position in a normal (demagnetized) state, and the plunger pops out in the excited state to move the second opening / closing member 424 to the open position.

  Other internal configurations of the lower plate 15 will be described. The discharge layer 403 includes a first discharge rail 428 for guiding game balls from the first discharge port 412a to the first discharge port 412b, and a second discharge rail for guiding game balls from the second discharge port 422a to the second discharge port 422b. 429 are provided. The first discharge rail 428 guides the game ball almost linearly from the first discharge port 412a to the first discharge port 412b. By configuring the first discharge rail 428 in this way, when the first discharge port 412a is opened, a large amount of game balls can be discharged to the outside via the first discharge rail 428 at a time. The diameter of the first discharge rail 428 is configured to be larger than the diameter of the second discharge rail 429. The second discharge rail 429 is provided with a discharge cam 430 on the side close to the second discharge port 422a via a rotating shaft, which straightens out the game balls flowing down in the second discharge rail 429 and sends them out to the downstream side. A discharge motor 432 that drives a discharge cam 430 via a rotation shaft and a rotation detection sensor 433 (see FIG. 25) that detects rotation of the discharge motor 432 are provided outside the second discharge rail 429.

  The discharge motor 432 is a stepping motor that is driven to rotate at a predetermined angle (3 degrees in this embodiment) by one step each time a pulse signal is received. That is, when a pulse for 30 steps is input, the discharge motor 432 is driven to rotate 90 degrees.

  The rotation detection sensor 433 detects that the discharge motor 432 rotates by 90 degrees, that is, the discharge motor 432 detects a pulse input for 30 steps. Then, when the rotation detection sensor 433 detects the rotation of the discharge motor 432 for 90 degrees, the value of the number of discharges input by the operation of the player described later is decremented by one. That is, the rotation detection sensor 433 has a function of detecting the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422a. Thus, by providing the rotation detection sensor 433 not provided in the first discharge unit 411 in the second discharge unit 421, the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422a in the second discharge unit 421 is reduced. Can be grasped internally. Thereby, the second discharge unit 421 can internally discharge the predetermined number of game balls, because the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422a is internally grasped. As a result, after discharging the game balls from the lower plate 15 to the outside, the labor for adjusting the number of the game balls according to the number of the discharged game balls is reduced. On the other hand, in the case of a general pachinko machine, since only a member such as the ball release lever 17 is provided on the lower plate, the number of game balls discharged depending on the timing of opening and closing the ball release lever 17 is reduced. It is easy to change, and it is difficult to discharge a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls stored in the lower plate.

  Each time the discharge cam 430 rotates by 180 degrees, the game balls that flow down the second discharge rail 429 are sent out one by one to the downstream side. Since the discharge cam 430 is connected to the discharge motor 432 via the rotating shaft, when the discharge motor 432 rotates by 90 degrees, it rotates 180 degrees and sends out one game ball to the downstream side. The game ball sent to the downstream side is guided by the second discharge rail 429 and discharged to the outside from the second discharge port 422b.

  Downstream of the discharge cam 430, a discharge ball count switch 434 for counting the number of game balls sent out by the discharge cam 430 is provided. This makes it possible to determine the occurrence of a discharge error when a discharge error has occurred such that a game ball has not been sent out despite the drive of the discharge cam 430. That is, from the rotation angle of the discharge motor 432 detected by the rotation detection sensor 433, the number of game balls estimated to have been sent out by the discharge cam 430 (estimated discharge number) can be known. From the count number detected by the discharge ball count switch 434, the number (actual discharge number) of game balls that actually pass through the second discharge port 422b can be determined. As a result of comparing the estimated number of emissions and the actual number of emissions, if the estimated number of emissions is larger than the actual number of emissions, it can be determined that an emission error has occurred, and the estimated number of emissions is equal to the number of actual emissions. In this case, it can be determined that a discharge error has not occurred. The cause of the discharge error is that there are no game balls to be discharged because the number of discharges input to a discharge operation unit 435 described later is larger than the number of game balls actually stored in the lower plate 15. It is possible that the discharge motor 432 is rotating in this state. As described above, the second discharge unit 421 is configured so that the discharge ball count switch 434 detects that the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422b reaches a predetermined number. In addition, a predetermined number of game balls can be accurately discharged.

  In addition, at the position on the left side of the outer wall surface of the lower plate 15, a discharging operation to be operated by the player when discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside using the second discharging unit 421. A part 435 is provided. The discharge operation unit 435 includes a setting button 435a for receiving an input operation for increasing the number of game balls to be discharged by, for example, 10 balls, and a setting for receiving an input operation for reducing the number of game balls to be discharged to, for example, 10 balls. It comprises a button 435b, a start button 435c for receiving an input operation for starting the discharging operation, and a stop button 435d for receiving an input operation for stopping the discharging operation.

  As described above, the discharge operation unit 435 is configured to be able to change the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 discharged by the second discharge unit 421 according to the operation of the player. In the case of a general pachinko machine, when the player slides a member such as the ball release lever 17 when discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate, all the game balls stored in the lower plate are externally provided. Since the game balls are ejected, it is difficult to eject a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls accommodated in the lower plate. On the other hand, in the second discharge unit 421, the number of game balls discharged from the lower plate 15 can be set to a predetermined number by operating the discharge operation unit 435, so that a desired number of game balls can be easily discharged. In addition, by providing the discharge operation unit 435 at a position on the left side of the outer wall surface of the lower plate 15, even when the player is operating the game ball firing handle 18 with the right hand, the discharge operation unit 435 can be placed on the empty left hand. The discharge operation unit 435 can be easily operated at a close position.

  On the right side of the discharge operation unit 435, a discharge indicator 436 for displaying the number of game balls set by the setting buttons 435a and 435b is provided. When the start button 435c is pressed, the discharge indicator 436 performs a countdown display in which the number of game balls whose discharge is detected is reduced from the set number of game balls. Further, the discharge indicator 436 is configured to be able to change the color of the display screen in order to execute a discharge error notification described later. Normally, the discharge indicator 436 displays the color of the display screen in green. However, when a discharge error described later occurs in the second discharge unit 421, the color of the display screen is changed from green to orange. You. This makes it easier for a player or a hall employee to notice an emission error described later.

  Next, the operation of the second opening / closing mechanism 423 will be described. The second discharge unit 421 starts discharging game balls contained in the lower plate 15 when receiving an operation of the discharge operation unit 435. When the discharge operation unit 435 receives the operation of the player, the solenoid 425 is excited, the plunger pops out in a direction to open the second discharge port 422a, and the second opening / closing member 424 moves to the open position. When the second outlet 422a is opened, the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 pass through the second outlet 422a. The game balls that have passed through the second discharge port 422a are sent out one ball at a time every time the discharge cam 430 rotates 180 degrees. When the number of game balls paid out by the discharge cam 430 reaches the number set by the operation of the discharge operation unit 435 by the player, the discharge motor 432 stops rotating. When the discharge motor 432 stops rotating, the solenoid 425 is demagnetized, the plunger returns to the original position, that is, the direction in which the second discharge port 422a is closed, and the second opening / closing member 424 moves to the closed position.

  It should be noted that the lower plate unit 13 is mostly formed of ABS resin like the inner frame 12. By doing so, the material has high viscosity and can be resistant to impact, and can be manufactured at low cost. In particular, the surface layer forming the lower plate 15 and the front panel portion at the back of the lower plate are formed of flame-retardant ABS resin. For this reason, this part is difficult to burn.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. It can be opened to the front side with the axis center. Moreover, the front frame set 14 is attached so as to fit into the outer wall (rib) 12b (see FIG. 3) of the inner frame 12. That is, since at least a part of the side surface of the front frame set 14 is attached so as to fit into the outer wall (rib) 12b of the inner frame 12, foreign matter ( Needles or thin plates) can be prevented. Further, since the front frame set 14 is made of a synthetic resin, specifically, an ABS resin, similarly to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 has high viscosity, can be resistant to impact, and can be manufactured at low cost.

  On the other hand, an upper plate 19 is integrally provided below the front frame set 14 (at a position above the lower plate 15 described above) as a receiving plate for game balls. Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing the game balls and guiding them toward the game ball launching device 38 while aligning them in a line. In the conventional pachinko machine, a front decoration frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame is provided below the front frame set, and an upper plate is provided in the front decoration frame, but in this embodiment, the front decoration frame is not provided. The upper plate 19 is provided directly on the front frame set 14 and omitted. Like the lower plate 15, the upper plate 19 has a surface layer formed of a flame-retardant ABS resin.

  Here, the front frame set 14 is provided so as to extend below the pachinko machine 10A so as not to interfere with the game ball launching handle 18 at least. The dimension (H1 in FIG. 1) up to the lower end of the front frame set 14 is, for example, about 201 mm in one existing model, and is about 30 mm smaller in the present pachinko machine 10A, and is about 172 mm. In addition, along with this, the dimension from the lower end of the pachinko machine 10A to the upper plate 19 (H2 in FIG. 1) is also reduced, for example, about 298 mm in one existing model, and 261 mm in the present pachinko machine 10A. Has become. In such a configuration, since the distance between the nozzle portion of the ball lending device and the upper plate 19 is increased by lowering the position of the upper plate 19, there is a concern that the game balls to be lent out may fall off. In the above, a part of the peripheral wall of the upper plate 19 is raised at a portion (a left side portion as viewed) of receiving the game ball from the nozzle portion (the high wall portion 19a in FIG. 1). Thereby, even when the position of the upper plate 19 is lowered, inconveniences such as spilling of the rental game balls are eliminated. The height of the high wall portion 19a may be any size as long as the height of the high plate 19 is lower than the height of the upper plate 19. In the first embodiment, the height is 25 mm.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 20 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially circular window hole 21 is formed in the center of the resin base 20. A game board 30 is detachably mounted on the rear side of the resin base 20. The game board 30 is made of square plywood, and is attached in a state where its peripheral edge is in contact with the back side of the resin base 20 (the inner frame 12). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 21 of the resin base 20. The length of the game board 30 in the up-down direction is 476 mm, and the length in the left-right direction is 452 mm (equivalent to the conventional size).

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 30. The game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a first starting opening 33 (for example, an operation chucker), a second starting opening 34 (for example, a through gate), a variable display device unit 35, and the like. These general winning opening 31, variable winning device 32, first starting opening 33 (for example, operating chucker), second starting opening 34 (for example, through gate), variable display unit 35, etc. It is provided in each through hole formed by processing, and is attached from the front side of the game board 30 with a wood screw or the like. A game ball enters the above-mentioned general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the first starting opening 33, and the incoming ball is detected by a detection switch (a winning opening switch 221, a count switch 223, an operation opening switch 224, and the like). , And a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15) based on the output of the detection switch. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, so that game balls that have not entered the various prize devices or the like are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 36. It has become. On the game board 30, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill 37 are provided.

  The variable display device unit 35 has a first symbol display device 42 that variably displays a first symbol (for example, a special symbol) as identification information in response to a prize in the first symbol 33, and a second symbol 34. And a second symbol display device 41 that variably displays a second symbol (for example, a normal symbol) with the passage of the symbol as a trigger.

  The second symbol display device 41 has a display portion 43 for the second symbol and a holding lamp 44. Each time a game ball passes through the second starting port 34, for example, a display symbol (normal symbol) by the display portion 43. Is fluctuated, and when the fluctuating display stops at a predetermined symbol, the first start port 33 is operated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the second starting port 34 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times held is displayed on the holding lamp 44. The display unit 43 may have a configuration in which the display is changed by switching the lighting of a plurality of lamps, or a configuration in which the display is changed and displayed in a part of the first symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device). . Similarly, the holding lamp 44 may have a configuration in which a part of the first symbol display device 42 is variably displayed.

  The first symbol display device 42 is configured as a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 45 described later. On the first symbol display device 42, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are variably displayed on the first symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each symbol row. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes a large 8-inch liquid crystal display. A center frame 47 is provided in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround the first symbol display device 42.

  The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won or hard to win, and is repeatedly operated between an open state in which the game balls can easily win and a normal closed state during a big hit. ing. More specifically, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 33, a symbol is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 42, and the final symbol after the stop is a predetermined combination of specific symbols. A special game state occurs in the necessary condition. Then, the big winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is configured to be in a predetermined open state with the opening of the opening / closing member 32a such as a door member, for example, so that the gaming balls can easily win (big hit state). Specifically, the elapse of a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings is defined as one round, and the special winning opening of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times. Between each round, an interval period in which the opening / closing member 32a is closed with the closing of the opening / closing member 32a is set. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the first starting port 33 is retained up to a maximum of four times, and the retained number is illuminated and displayed on the retention lamp 46. Note that the holding lamp 46 may be configured to be variably displayed on a part of the first symbol display device 42 or the like.

  The game board 30 is provided with a rail unit 50 for guiding the game balls fired from the game ball launching device 38 to the upper part of the game board 30. The played game ball is guided to a predetermined game area through the rail unit 50. The rail unit 50 is formed of a ring-shaped resin molded product (for example, molded by adding a fluorine resin), and has an inner rail 51 and an outer rail 52 which are integrally formed inside and outside. . In addition, since the rail unit 50 is molded by adding a fluororesin, the frictional resistance of the game ball on the back surface 50a shown in FIG. 3 can be reduced. The inner rail 51 is formed in a substantially annular shape except for about an upper quarter, and an outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly a left side) faces the inner rail 51. In such a case, a guide rail is formed by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and a ball guide passage is formed by a portion (the left side as viewed) where the rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other with a predetermined interval. The ball guide passage is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove shape having an open front side.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 6) of the inner rail 51. This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 30 from the ball guide passage between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 returns to the ball guide passage again. I have. A return rubber 54 is attached to the outer rail 52 at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball (upper right portion in FIG. 8: a portion corresponding to the tip of the outer rail 52). Therefore, the game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and rebounds. On the inner surface of the outer rail 52, in order to make the flying of the game ball smoother, that is, to reduce the frictional resistance of the game ball, a sliding plate 55 as a long stainless steel metal band is provided. Has been attached.

  An arc-shaped flange 56 that protrudes outward is formed on the outer peripheral portion of the rail unit 50. The flange 56 forms a mounting surface for the game board 30. When the rail unit 50 is mounted on the game board 30, the flange 56 abuts on the game board 30, and in this state, screws or the like are inserted through a plurality of through holes formed in the flange 56, and the game board is The rail unit 50 is fastened to the rail 30. In the first embodiment, in order to securely fasten at least the left side of the rail unit 50 to the game board 30, the left side of the rail unit 50 is fastened to the game board 30 with more screws than the right side. The adhesion of the left side of 50 to the game board 30 can be improved, and the ball can easily fly. This is because if the left side of the rail unit 50 is shaky with respect to the game board 30, the momentum of the game balls emitted to the rail unit 50 is absorbed by the wobble.

  Further, in the present embodiment, each of the upper, lower, left, and right ends of the rail unit 50 when viewed from the front is formed substantially linearly (flat). That is, the flange 56 is cut off at each of the upper, lower, left and right ends of the rail unit 50, so that the rail diameter can be expanded in a finite area of the pachinko machine 10A, that is, the game area on the game board 30 can be expanded. ing.

  A convex portion 57 is formed at the entrance of the ball guide passage between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 so as to partially close the ball guide passage. The convex portion 57 is provided in a substantially vertical direction from the inner rail 51 to the lower end portion of the rail unit 50, and a foul ball flowing backward in the ball guide passage without reaching the game area is formed in a foul ball passage 63 (see FIG. 3). Serve to guide. The lower right corner and the lower left corner of the gaming board 30 are spaces for sticking stickers (S1, S2 in FIG. 6) such as a stamp (for example, a serial number is described) and plates. Notches 58 and 59 are formed in the flange 56 to secure this attachment space. By sticking a seal such as a stamp (S1, S2 in FIG. 6) on the lower right corner or the lower left corner of the game board 30, the uniqueness of the game board 30 and the stamp can be imparted.

  Next, the game area will be described. The game area is formed into a substantially circular shape by the inner peripheral portion (inner and outer rails) of the rail unit 50. In the present embodiment, the game area defined on the board of the game board 30 is far greater than before. It is largely configured. In the present embodiment, the distance between the uppermost point of the outer rail 52 and the lower part of the game board 30 is 445 mm (58 mm longer than the conventional product), and is between the extreme left position of the outer rail 52 and the extreme right position of the inner rail 51. Is 435 mm (50 mm longer than the conventional product). The distance from the extreme left position of the inner rail 51 to the extreme right position of the inner rail 51 is 418 mm.

  In the present embodiment, the game area, when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10A, excludes the area of the guide rail, which is a parallel part of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52, of the area surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. Area. Therefore, when the game area is referred to, the guide rail portion is not included, and thus the left limit position toward the game area is specified by the inner rail 51 instead of the outer rail 52. Similarly, the right limit position toward the game area is specified by the inner rail 51. The lower limit position of the game area is specified by the lower end position of the game board 30. The upper limit position of the game area is specified by the outer rail 52.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width of the game area (maximum width in the left-right direction) is 418 mm, and the height of the game area (maximum width in the up-down direction) is 445 mm.

  Here, the width of the game area is desirably at least 380 mm or more. More preferably, it is 390 mm or more, 400 mm or more, 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and further preferably 460 mm or more. Of course, it may be 470 mm or more. That is, the width of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of expanding the game area. It is desirable that the height of the game area is at least 400 mm or more. More preferably, it is 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and more preferably 460 mm or more. Of course, it may be 470 mm or more, 480 mm or more, and 490 mm or more. That is, it is preferable that the height of the game area is larger from the viewpoint of expanding the game area. The combination of the width and the height may be any combination of the above numerical values.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the area of the game area to the game board 30 is about 70%, which is much larger than that of the related art. Note that the area ratio of the game area to the game board 30 is only about 50% in the past, and it can be said that the game area is considerably expanded on the assumption that the game board 30 is common. In addition, the outer shape of the pachinko machine 10A is almost uniform among manufacturers for convenience of installation in a game arcade, and the size of the game board 30 has to be the same. The fact that the ratio of the area of the game area to the game area is increased by about 20% is very significant from the viewpoint of expanding the game area. Here, the ratio is desirably at least 60% or more. It is still more preferably at least 65%, more preferably at least 70%. Further, it is more preferable that the ratio is 75% or more, which exceeds the case of the present embodiment. Further, it may be 80% or more.

  The ratio of the area of the game area to the area of the entire pachinko machine 10A on the front side is about 40%, which is much larger than the conventional area. It is desirable that the area ratio of the game area to the area of the entire pachinko machine 10A on the front side is 35% or more. Of course, it may be 40% or more, 45% or more, or 50% or more.

  In addition, the second starting ports 34 located on both sides of the variable display device unit 35 have a guide mechanism such that game balls passing through the second starting ports 34 can be moved toward the center. Thereby, even when the game area is extended in the left-right direction, the game ball can be guided toward the first starting opening 33 and the variable winning device 32 at the center, and the game area can be further extended. A decrease in amusement due to difficulty in winning a game ball by being expanded is suppressed. Furthermore, since the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, the windmill 37, the second starting port 34, a plurality of nails (guide nails for guiding a game ball to the center), and various other accessories are arranged. The behavior of the game balls in the game areas on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 35 can be made more interesting. In addition, since the game area is expanded in the vertical direction, the windmill 37, the second starting port 34, a plurality of nails, and other accessories can be further disposed, and the game area can be arranged in the vertical direction in the game area. Of the game ball can be made more interesting.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 3, a firing rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being fired from the game ball firing device 38 is attached to the resin base 20 below the window hole 21 (game board 30). ing. The firing rail 61 is attached and fixed to the resin base 20 via a metal plate 62 at the rear thereof, and is configured to extend linearly at a predetermined firing angle (launch angle). Therefore, the game ball fired in accordance with the turning operation of the game ball firing handle 18 is firstly launched obliquely upward along the firing rail 61, and then to a predetermined game area through the ball guide passage of the rail unit 50 as described above. You will be guided.

  In the case of the present pachinko machine 10A, it has already been described that the game area is greatly expanded as compared with the conventional one, but under such a configuration, the curvature of the guide rail has to be reduced, so that the launch ball is stabilized. It needs some ingenuity. Therefore, in this embodiment, the launch position of the game ball is lowered, and the inclination angle (launch angle) of the launch rail 61 is made somewhat larger than that of the existing one (that is, the launch rail 61 is started up). The length of the rail 61 is made longer than that of the existing rail to ensure a sufficient ball guiding distance. Thereby, the game balls fired from the game ball firing device 38 can be guided to the guide rail in a more stable state. In this case, in particular, the firing rail 61 is formed so as to extend from the firing position of the game ball firing device 38 to a position beyond the center position (out port 36) of the game area.

  Also, There is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 and the rail unit 50 (guide rail). A foul ball passage 63 is formed below the gap. Therefore, what if, When the game ball fired from the game ball firing device 38 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball in the guide rail, The foul ball is discharged to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 63. By the way, In the case of this embodiment, The length of the launch rail 61 is about 240 mm, The length of the gap at the tip of the firing rail (length on the extension of the firing rail 61) is about 40 mm.

  When the foul ball flows backward in the guide rail, most of the foul ball flows along the outer rail 52 and falls downward when it reaches the lower end of the outer rail 52. However, some foul balls fall in the guide rail. In some cases, it jumps to the inner rail 51 side. At this time, the bounced foul ball hits the convex portion 57 at the entrance of the ball guide passage, and is guided to the foul ball passage 63. This ensures that all the foul balls are guided to the foul ball passage 63. As a result, interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be fired next is suppressed.

  Although detailed drawings are omitted, the game ball launching device 38 is supplied with game balls one by one from a ball outlet on the front frame set 14 side (a ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 19). . At this time, in the present embodiment, since the launch position of the game ball is lowered, the head from the ball exit on the front frame set 14 side to the launch position becomes large, but near the base end of the launch rail 61 and the right side thereof. Guide members 65 and 66 were installed on the near side, respectively. Thereby, the game ball supplied from the ball outlet on the front frame set 14 side is always set at a predetermined firing position, and a stable firing operation can be realized. A game ball launching device 38 is provided with a ball-hitting hammer, and a game ball is fired with the rotation of the ball-hitting hammer about a shaft portion. It is desired to reduce the weight of the ball-hitting hammer. Therefore, while reducing the weight of the ball-hitting hammer by changing the material to light metal such as aluminum and reducing the size of the shaft portion, the head portion of the ball-hitting hammer (the opposite side of the shaft (End) is provided with a weight portion. Thereby, a sufficient and stable launch of the game ball can be realized. Providing the weight portion of the hitting hammer so as to protrude upward allows the hitting hammer to be easily picked or hooked, and has an effect of easily adjusting the hitting strength of the hammer tip.

  In addition, reference numeral 67 in FIG. 3 denotes a discharge port which communicates with the upper plate 19, and game balls are discharged to the upper plate 19 via the discharge port 67. An opening / closing shutter 68 that is displaced between a substantially horizontal state and a substantially vertical state around a substantially horizontal rotation axis is attached to the discharge port 67. In a state where the front frame set 14 is released from the inner frame 12 (the state shown in FIG. 3), the shutter 68 is changed from a substantially horizontal state to a substantially vertical state by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the game ball does not fall out from the discharge port 67. The outlet 67 is closed. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by a ball passage gutter 69 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14 to be in a substantially horizontal state. The game balls discharged to the side are discharged to the upper plate 19 through the ball passage gutter 69 without any leakage. Accordingly, in the pachinko machine 10A in which the front decorative frame is omitted and the upper plate 19 is directly provided on the front frame set 14, when the front frame set 14 is opened, the game balls in the payout passage and the like are outside the pachinko machine 10A. Inconveniences such as spilling can be prevented.

  The resin base 20 is provided with a substantially rectangular small window 71 at the lower right of the window hole 21. Therefore, a seal (S1 in FIG. 6) such as a stamp stamped on the lower right corner of the game board 30 is visible through the small window 71. In addition, a seal or the like can be attached from the small window 71.

  As shown in FIG. 3, support brackets 81 and 82 are attached to the left end of the inner frame 12 as a support mechanism of the front frame set 14. The upper support member 81 is provided with a support hole 83 having a notch on the near side in the drawing, and the lower support member 82 is provided with a projection shaft 84 which protrudes in the vertical direction.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a front frame set open detection switch 90 for detecting that the front frame set 14 has been opened with respect to the inner frame 12 is provided above the inner frame 12. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the output is output from the front frame set open detection switch 90 to the computer for use in the hall (in the pachinko parlor). When the front frame set 14 is closed, the metal reinforcing plates 132 and 131 of the front frame set 14 shown in FIG. 9 come into contact with the pair of metal fittings 92 of the inner frame 12 shown in FIG. The ground of the front frame set 14 is secured.

  Here, the above-described front frame set 14 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a rear view of the front frame set 14. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed in the front frame set 14 so that most of the game area can be visually recognized from the outside. More specifically, the window 101 has a shape in which the substantially central portions on the left and right sides are relatively gently curved as compared with the upper and lower sides. Note that the substantially central portion may be linear. In the present embodiment, the distance between the upper end of the window 101 (the uppermost part of the outer rail 52, the upper end of the game area) and the upper end of the front frame set 14 (the so-called vertical width of the upper frame portion) is 61 mm. And the upper frame width is about 85 mm to 95 mm, which is significantly shorter than that of the related art. As a result, the upper area of the game area is easily secured, and the large-sized variable display device unit 35 can be disposed relatively above. The distance between the upper end of the front frame set 14 is preferably 80 mm or less, more preferably 70 mm or less, and even more preferably 60 mm or less. Of course, as long as the predetermined strength can be secured, it may be 50 mm or less.

  Further, the shortest distance between the left end of the window 101 and the left end of the front frame set 14 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10A (the so-called left and right width of a left frame portion: shown on the right in FIG. 9), The frame width on the opening / closing axis side is set relatively large in order to increase the strength and support strength of the front frame set 14 itself. In this case, as is apparent from a comparison between FIGS. 1 and 3, when the front frame set 14 is closed, not only the left end of the outer rail 52 but also the left end of the inner rail 51 are the left frame portion. Obscured by. That is, at least a part of the guide rail overlaps and is covered by the left frame portion of the front frame set 14 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10A. Even if the game ball becomes temporarily difficult to visually recognize, it is merely a passing point at which the game ball is guided to the game area, and it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball in the game area where the player mainly enjoys the game. Not necessarily. Therefore, there is no hindrance in the actual game. In addition, while such trouble does not occur, sufficient strength and support strength of the front frame set 14 can be secured. Incidentally, when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10A, the left-right distance between the left end position of the outer rail 52 and the left end position of the outer frame 11 is 21 mm, the right end position of the game area (the right end position of the inner rail 51) and the outer frame 11 The distance in the left-right direction from the right end position is 44 mm.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame set 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect during the game by controlling the light-emission mode such as lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. For example, on the periphery of the window 101, an annular illuminated portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided symmetrically, and at the center of the annular illuminated portion 102 and on the top of the pachinko machine 10A, Similarly, a central illuminated portion 103 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In the pachinko machine 10A, the central illumination unit 103 functions as a big hit lamp, and lights or blinks at the time of the big hit to notify that the big hit is being made. In addition, around the upper plate 19, there is also provided an upper plate illuminating unit 104 which also incorporates a light emitting means such as an LED. In addition, on the left and right sides of the central illumination unit 103, there are provided a prize ball lamp 105 which lights up during payout of a prize ball and an error display lamp 106 which lights up when a predetermined error occurs. A small window 107 made of a transparent resin is provided adjacent to the lower end of the annular illumination part 102 so that a part of the surface of the inner frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30 can be visually recognized. Since the predetermined portion of the small window 107 has a planar shape, a certificate stamp or the like affixed to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be suitably read from the planar portion of the small window 107 by a machine.

  A ball lending operation unit 120 is provided below the window 101. The ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121, a return button 122, and a frequency display unit 123. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10A, the lending of game balls is performed according to the operation. Done. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 19 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. The frequency display unit 123 displays remaining amount information such as cards. In a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly rented from a ball rental device or the like to an upper plate without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball rental operation section 120 is not required. Therefore, an ornamental seal or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball lending operation unit 120. Thereby, the ball-lending operation unit can be shared between the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the vicinity of the small window 107 on the left side of the front frame set 14 is prevented from protruding more than necessary to the front side (front side in FIG. 1). By doing so, when lending game balls directly to the upper plate 19 from the card sand ball lending device provided on the left side of the pachinko machine 10A, the tip of the nose portion (so-called elephant nose) of the ball lending device is discharged. The exit can be preferably positioned above the upper plate 19, and the upper plate 19 can receive game balls lent from the nose portion of the ball rental device.

  Various reinforcing members made of metal are provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 so as to surround the window 101. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, reinforcing plates 131, 132, 133, and 134 are attached to the back side of the front frame set 14 and to the outside of the window 101 at the upper, lower, left, and right sides, respectively. These reinforcing plates 131 to 134 are connected in contact with each other, but a resin part 135 for avoiding direct contact is interposed at the connecting portion of the reinforcing plates 132 and 133 on the left and upper sides in the figure. Since the resin part 135 is interposed between the connecting portions of the reinforcing plates 132 and 133 in this manner, noise can be prevented from being looped by the reinforcing plates 131 to 134. 7, a hook-shaped engaging claw 131a is provided at an intermediate position between the reinforcing plate 131 and the engaging claw 131a. It is configured to be engaged with the hole 12a (see FIG. 3). With this configuration, the front frame set 14 is configured to include the upper plate 19, and even when the vertical support positions are extended, the front frame set 14 can be prevented from floating at the intermediate position. Therefore, fraudulent acts or the like with the front frame set 14 floating are suppressed.

  The lower reinforcing plate 134 is provided with a rail side wall member 136 made of resin at a position facing the firing rail 61 (see FIG. 3). The rail side wall member 136 becomes a side wall of the firing rail 61 when the front frame set 14 is closed. Therefore, the game ball does not fall off the firing rail 61.

  The above-mentioned reinforcing plates 131 to 134 also have a function as a metal frame for supporting the glass, and a part of the reinforcing plates 131 to 134 is folded back to form a glass holding groove. The glass holding grooves are formed in two front and rear rows, and a pair of front and rear glasses 137 having a rectangular shape are held by the respective glass holding grooves. As a result, the two glasses 137 are attached to the front and rear at predetermined intervals.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, since the game area is expanded, when the front frame set 14 is closed, one of the guide rails constituted by the inner and outer rails 52 and 53 is provided. The part is covered and covered by the front frame set 14. Therefore, in the guide rail, there is a portion where the open portion on the near side cannot be covered with the glass 137. In such a case, for example, when the game ball fired from the game ball launching device 38 returns without reaching the return ball prevention member 53, the game ball spills out (or jumps out) of the guide rail, and the outer rail 52 and the glass 137. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a rail cover 140 for covering the front opening of the guide rail is attached to the front frame set 14.

  The rail cover 140 is a substantially flat plate having a substantially circular arc shape, and is formed of a transparent resin. The rail cover 140 has an arc shape corresponding to the shape of the guide rail. It is attached to the back of the set 14. In particular, the dimensions and shape on the inner diameter side of the rail cover 140 substantially match those of the inner rail 52. In a state where the rail cover 140 is attached, a surface side thereof comes into contact with the glass 137. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the rear surface of the rail cover 140 covers almost the entire area of the guide rail. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball from colliding with the glass 137 in most sections of the guide rail. Therefore, adverse effects such as breakage due to contact with the glass 137 can be suppressed.

  Further, at the right end of the rail cover 140 (that is, the portion which becomes the right end in the state in FIG. A covering section 141 for covering is provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a problem that the game ball spills (projects) out of the guide rail or is caught between the outer rail 52 and the glass 137.

  Further, on the back side of the rail cover 140, a ridge 142 extending in an arc shape along the inner edge thereof and projecting toward the near side in FIG. 9 is formed. The protruding ridge 142 is configured to substantially integrally overlap the inner rail 52 in a state where the ridge 142 enters the guide rail when the front frame set 14 is closed. Therefore, for example, even if wire or the like is made to enter through a gap between the front frame set 14 and the inner frame 12 to perform an illegal act, it is very difficult to make the wire or the like enter the game area inside the guide rail. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts performed using wires or the like. Note that the protrusions 142 may be formed in a wider range, for example, along the entire inner edge of the rail cover 140. According to such a configuration, it is difficult for wires or the like to enter the wire in a wider range. Can be more reliably prevented from being used.

  Support brackets 151 and 152 are attached to the right end (the left end when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10A) of the front frame set 14 in FIG. Therefore, the front frame set 14 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by assembling the support brackets 151 and 152 of the front frame set 14 with the support brackets 81 and 82 (see FIG. 3) of the inner frame 12. Will be attached.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10A will be described in detail. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10A, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10A for each main component.

  First, an overall outline of the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10A will be described. On the back side of the pachinko machine 10A (actually, on the back side of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30), various control boards are arranged so as to be arranged vertically and horizontally, or to be stacked back and forth. A game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls, a protective cover made of resin, and the like are attached. In this embodiment, various control boards are separately mounted on two mounts to form two control board units, and these control board units are individually mounted on the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. ing. In this case, the main board and the sound lamp control board are mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the payout control board, the emission control board, and the power supply board are mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Here, for convenience, the former unit is referred to as a “first control board unit 201”, and the latter unit is referred to as a “second control board unit 202”.

  Further, the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are also integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called a back pack. Therefore, the unit is herein referred to as a “back pack unit 203”. The detailed configuration of each of the units 201 to 203 will be described later.

  The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured so that they can be attached and detached without using any tool or the like in a unit unit. The inner frame 12 or the back side of the game board 30 can be opened and closed. This is also a device for making it possible to easily check a hidden configuration or the like even when the units 201 to 203 and other components are arranged one above the other.

  In practice, the units 201 to 203 are arranged and attached as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. In FIG. 10, the first control board unit 201 having a substantially L-shape is arranged substantially at the center of the pachinko machine 10A, and the second control board unit 202 is arranged below the first control board unit 201. Further, a back pack unit 203 is disposed in a region partially overlapping the first control board unit 201.

  Specifically, the first control board unit 201 is provided with a spindle M1 at the left end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10A, and the first control board unit 201 is arranged around the axis A of the spindle M1. It can be opened and closed. Further, the first control board unit 201 is provided with a fastening portion M2 made of a nip latch or the like at the right end thereof (that is, on the side opposite to the support shaft portion, more specifically, at the open end side), and at the upper end portion thereof with a locking claw M3. The first control board unit 201 is fixedly held to the pachinko machine main body by the fastening portion M2 and the locking claw portion M3.

  Further, the second control board unit 202 is provided with a spindle M4 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10A, and the second control board unit 202 is opened and closed about an axis B by the spindle M4. It is possible. Further, the second control board unit 202 is provided with a fastening portion M5 made of a nip latch or the like at its left end (that is, on the side opposite to the support shaft, more specifically, at the open end). The two control board unit 202 is fixedly held to the pachinko machine main body.

  Further, the back pack unit 203 is provided with a spindle M6 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10A, and the back pack unit 203 can be opened and closed about an axis C by the spindle M6. I have. Further, the back pack unit 203 is provided with a fastening portion M7 made of a nip latch or the like at a left end portion thereof (that is, on the opposite side to the support shaft portion, more specifically, at an open end side). Are provided, and the back pack unit 203 is fixedly held to the pachinko machine main body by the fastening portions M7 and the locking portions M8, M9.

  In this case, the developing directions of the units 201 to 203 are not the same, and the first control board unit 201 opens leftward when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10A, whereas the second control board unit 202 and the back pack unit 203 is configured to open to the right.

  On the other hand, FIG. 11 is a rear view showing a configuration in which the game board 30 is assembled to the inner frame 12. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the inner frame 12 viewed from the rear, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board 30 viewed from the rear. Here, the back surface configuration of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The game board 30 is installed in a square frame-shaped installation area surrounded by the resin base 20 and does not fall off due to a plurality of (four in this embodiment) locking fixtures 211 and 212 provided on the inner frame 12. So that it is fixed. The locking fixtures 211 and 212 can be manually rotated, and can be switched between a fixed position (lock position) and a fixed release position (unlock position). FIG. 11 shows a locked state. The locking fixtures 211 at three places on the left and right sides of the game board 30 are L-shaped metal fittings formed by bending metal pieces, and are configured so as not to protrude outside the inner frame when the game board 30 is fixed. In addition, the locking fixture 212 at one lower portion of the game board 30 is an I-shaped fastener made of resin.

  In the center of the game board 30, a variable display unit 35 is arranged. In the variable display device unit 35, a resin (for example, ABS) frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 (see FIG. 3) from behind is provided so as to protrude rearward. A first symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, and a display control device 45 are detachably mounted in a state where they are superimposed on each other. In the frame cover 213, an LED control board and the like for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 are provided.

  A back frame set 215 is attached to the back of the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display device unit 35. The back frame set 215 is a thin resin molded product (for example, made of ABS) provided so as to be attached to the back surface of the game board 30, and a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won various winning ports. Is formed. In detail, below the back frame set 215, the above-mentioned general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the first starting opening 33 (each shown in FIG. 3) correspond to the game board openings, and 1 downstream. A collection passage 216 that gathers at two locations is formed. A discharge passage board 217 also made of resin (for example, made of polycarbonate resin) is attached to the inner frame 12 below the game board 30. The discharge passage board 217 has a discharge ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10A. A discharge passage 218 for guiding is formed. Therefore, as illustrated by virtual lines in FIG. 11, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 31 and the like gather through the collection passage 216 of the back frame set 215, and further, the discharge passage 218 of the discharge passage board 217 is formed. The pachinko machine 10A is discharged through the pachinko machine. The out port 36 (see FIG. 3) also communicates with the discharge passage 218, and game balls that have not won any of the winning ports are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10A via the discharge passage 218.

  In the above configuration, a back frame set 215 (recovery passage 216) is provided above and a discharge passage board 217 (discharge passage 218) is provided below with the lower end surface of the game board 30 as a boundary. The game board 30 is provided without overlapping in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when removing the game board 30 from the inner frame 12, there is no inconvenience that the discharge passage board 217 hinders the removal of the game board.

  The discharge passage board 217 is provided just around the back of the upper plate 19 on the front of the pachinko machine. A wire or the like is inserted through a ball discharge port (the ball passage gutter 69 in FIG. 2) reaching the upper plate 19, and furthermore, It is conceivable that a fraudulent act such as a wire or the like is caused to enter the game area through a gap between the inner frame 12 and the discharge passage board 217. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10A, a plate 219 extending forward of the pachinko machine is provided just around the upper plate 19 of the discharge passage board 217 so as to overlap the inner frame 12 almost integrally. Therefore, even if wires or the like are caused to enter from the gap between the inner frame 12 and the discharge passage board 217, the wires or the like are impeded by the plate 219, and it is very difficult to allow the wires or the like to enter the game area. As a result, fraudulent acts such as forcibly opening the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) using a wire or the like can be prevented.

  Further, on the back surface of the game board 30, there is provided a winning detection mechanism for detecting the passage of a game ball such as various winning ports. Specifically, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and the variable winning device 32 is provided with a specific area switch 222 and a count switch 223. The specific area switch 222 is a switch that determines that the game ball that has won the variable prize device 32 in the big hit state has entered a specific area (an area for determining whether to continue the big hit state). This is a switch to count. An operating port switch 224 is provided at a position corresponding to the first starting port 33, and a gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the second starting port 34.

  The winning opening switch 221 and the gate switch 225 are connected to a board relay board 226 through electric wiring (not shown), and the board relay board 226 is connected to a main board (main control device) described later. The specific area switch 222 and the count switch 223 are connected to a special winning opening relay board 227, and the special winning opening relay board 227 is also connected to the main board. On the other hand, the operation port switch 224 is directly connected to the main board without going through the relay board.

  Although not shown, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a special winning opening solenoid for opening a special winning opening and a winning ball distribution plate solenoid for guiding a winning ball to a specific area. The starting port 33 is provided with an operating port solenoid for opening the electric accessory. In FIG. 11, reference numeral 228 denotes a set handle provided with a hitting hammer and the like, and reference numeral 229 denotes a firing motor.

  The detection results respectively detected by the prize sensing mechanism are taken into a main board, which will be described later, and a payout command (payout number of game balls) corresponding to a prize situation is transmitted from the main board to a payout control board. You. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board. In such a case, a conventional method (a so-called evidential ball method) in which game balls that have won various winning ports are once collected in a winning ball processing device, and the payout balls are checked out one by one by the winning ball processing device and paid out one by one. Unlike the pachinko machine 10A of the present embodiment, the payout is immediately performed by electrically detecting the winning of the game ball for each winning port (ie, the winning ball processing device is abolished in the pachinko machine 10A). are doing). Therefore, even if there are a large number of game balls to be paid out, the payout can be promptly carried out. However, the conventional “evidence sphere method” may be applied to the present invention.

  The back frame set 215 is provided with a mounting mechanism for mounting the first control board unit 201. Specifically, as this attachment mechanism, a support bracket 231 extending in the vertical direction is provided at the lower left corner when viewed from the back surface of the game board 30, and the support bracket 231 has a pair of upper and lower support holes 231a on the same axis. Are formed. In addition, reference numeral 232 denotes a pair of upper and lower fastened holes (nilac holes) in the lower right portion of the game board 30, and reference numeral 233 denotes a locking claw piece in the upper left portion.

  An attachment mechanism for attaching the second control board unit 202 and the back pack unit 203 is provided on the back surface of the inner frame 12. Specifically, an elongate support member 235 is attached to the right end of the inner frame 12, and the configuration is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the support bracket 235 has a long plate-shaped bracket main body 236, and the support holes 237 for the second control board unit are provided at two lower positions so as to stand up from the bracket main body 236. At the same time, support holes 238 for the back pack unit are formed at two upper positions. Coaxial support holes are formed in the support holes 237 and 238, respectively. In addition, as an attachment mechanism for the second control board unit, the inner frame 12 is provided with a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (niatch latch holes) 239 at the left end portion below the game board installation area. Further, as a mounting mechanism for the back pack unit, the inner frame 12 is provided with a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (nilac holes) 240 at the left end of the game board installation area. However, it is also possible to provide the support fitting for the second control board unit and the support fitting for the back pack unit as individual members. Reference numerals 241, 242, and 243 denote rotating fixtures for sandwiching and supporting the back pack unit 203 with the game board 30.

  In addition, in the rear configuration of the inner frame 12, a lower right portion of the game board 30 is provided for distributing game balls to be paid out from a payout mechanism 352 described later to any one of the upper plate 19, the lower plate 15, and the discharge passage 218. A game ball distribution unit 245 is provided. That is, the opening 245 a of the game ball distribution unit 245 communicates with the upper plate 19, the opening 245 b communicates with the lower plate 15, and the opening 245 c communicates with the discharge passage 218. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 20, the game ball distribution unit 245 is separate from a payout mechanism unit 352 described below, which is located above the game ball distribution unit 245. As shown in FIG. 12, the game ball distributing section 245 is fixedly fastened to the inner frame 12 with screws, for example, by inserting foreign matter from the discharge port 67 (see FIG. 3) of the upper plate 19 of the pachinko machine 10A. Even if it does not move, that is, there is no possibility that the game ball distribution unit 245 is pushed to the back side to make a gap between the game ball distribution unit 245 and the inner frame 12, and a foreign object is inserted into this gap. Fraud can be prevented.

  At the lower end of the inner frame 12, a speaker box 246 made of resin for surrounding the back of a speaker 25 provided on the back of the lower plate unit 13 is attached. Improvements are being made.

  Next, the first control board unit 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 is a front view of the first control board unit 201, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the same unit 201, FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the same unit 201, and FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the same unit 201 viewed from the back. .

  The first control board unit 201 has a substantially L-shaped mount 251 on which a main controller 261 and a sound lamp controller 262 are mounted. Here, the main control device 261 includes a CPU that controls the main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port that communicates with various devices, and a port for various lotteries. A main board including a random number generator to be used, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, and the like are provided, and the main board is made of a board box 263 (transparent means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. ). The board box 263 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are non-openably connected by a sealing unit 264 (sealing means), whereby the substrate box 263 is sealed.

  As the sealing unit 264 as the sealing means, any configuration can be applied as long as the box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened. Here, as shown in FIG. 16 and the like, five sealing members are connected. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened by inserting a locking claw into the long hole of the sealing member. The sealing process by the sealing unit 264 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the opening / sealing process again even after the completion. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into the long hole of at least one of the five sealing members constituting the sealing unit 264. Then, when the board box 263 is opened due to a defect of the housed main board or the like, the connection between the sealing member in which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing member is disconnected. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing members. If a history indicating that the board box 263 has been opened is left in the board box 263, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 263 that unauthorized opening has been performed.

  The sound lamp control device 262 is, for example, a CPU that controls sound and lamp display according to an instruction from the main control device 261 (main board) or the display control device 45, and a sound lamp including ROM, RAM, various ports, and the like. The audio lamp control board is provided in a board box 265 made of a transparent resin material or the like. A power supply relay board 266 is mounted on the audio lamp control device 262, and power supplied from a power supply board described later is output to the display control device 45 and the audio lamp control device 262 via the power supply relay board 266. It has become.

  The mounting base 251 is formed of a colored (for example, green, blue, etc.) resin material (for example, made of polycarbonate resin), and has two flat substrate mounting surfaces 252, 253 on its surface. The board mounting surfaces 252 and 253 extend in a direction orthogonal to each other and are formed with a step in the front-rear direction. However, the mounting base 251 may be a colorless transparent or translucent resin molded product.

  The main control device 261 (main substrate) is disposed horizontally on one of the substrate mounting surfaces 252, and the audio lamp control device 262 (audio lamp control substrate) is disposed on the other substrate mounting surface 253 in the vertical direction. It is arranged to be oriented. In particular, the main control device 261 is disposed on the near side when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10A, and the sound lamp control device 262 is disposed on the back side. In this case, since the board mounting surfaces 252 and 253 are formed with a step in the front-rear direction, the control devices 261 and 262 are mounted in a state where the main control device 261 and the sound lamp control device 262 are mounted on the board mounting surfaces 252 and 253. Will be arranged so that a part of them is overlapped. That is, as seen in FIG. 16 and the like, main controller 261 is arranged in a state where a part thereof (about ３ in the present embodiment) is floating. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 262 can be extended to an area overlapping with the main control device 261, and it is possible to cope with an increase in the size of the control board. In addition, each control device can be installed efficiently. Further, when the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the game board 30, a space is secured behind the board mounting surface 252, and the variable winning device 32 and its electric wiring and the like can be installed without difficulty.

  As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, horizontally long through holes 254 are formed at two places on the left and right sides of the board mounting surface 252 for the main board. Correspondingly, the board box 263 of the main control device 261 is provided with pivotable fixing members 267 at two places on the left and right sides on the back surface. When the main controller 261 is mounted on the board mounting surface 252, the fixture 267 is passed through the through hole 254 of the board mounting surface 252, and in this state, the fixture 267 is rotated to lock the main controller 261. You. Therefore, as described above, even if the main control device 261 is arranged in a state where a part of the main control device 261 is floated, inconvenience such as the main control device 261 falling off can be avoided. Main controller 261 opens back pack unit 203 about axis C and opens first control board unit 201 about axis A, and then opens first control board unit 201 (board mounting surface 252). Unless the fixture 267 is unlocked from the back side of (2), it cannot be removed, so that a deterrent effect against improper acts such as removal of the substrate can be expected. A lattice-shaped rib 255 is provided on the back surface of the substrate mounting surface 252 for the main substrate.

  The mounting base 251 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 256 on the left end surface in FIG. 16 and the like. The first control board unit 201 is mounted by attaching the support shafts 256 to the support fittings 231 shown in FIG. The game board 30 is supported to be openable and closable. Further, the mounting base 251 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nip latches 257 as fasteners at the right end and a long hole 258 at the upper end, and fits the ny latch 257 into the to-be-fastened hole 232 shown in FIG. The first control board unit 201 is fixed to the game board 30 by locking the locking claw pieces 233 shown in FIG. Note that the support bracket 231 and the support shaft 256 are provided in the support shaft portion M1 of FIG. 10, the fastening holes 232 and the nylat 257 are provided in the fastening portion M2, the locking claw pieces 233 and the elongated holes 258 are provided in the locking claw portion M3, Each corresponds.

  Next, the second control board unit 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the second control board unit 202, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the unit 202, and FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 202. However, FIG. 20 shows a state in which the card unit connection board 314 has been removed from the mounting base 301 for convenience.

  The second control board unit 202 has a horizontally long mounting base 301, on which a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection substrate 314 are mounted. The dispensing control device 311, the launch control device 312, and the power supply device 313 include a CPU serving as a control center and a control board including a ROM, a RAM, various ports, and the like, as is well known, and the dispensing control of the dispensing control device 311. The payout of the prize ball and the rental ball is controlled by the board. In addition, the firing control board of the firing control device 312 controls the firing motor 229 in accordance with the operation of the game ball firing handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply 313 controls the predetermined power supply voltage required by various control devices and the like. Is generated and output. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown), and takes in a ball lending operation command by the player and sends it to the payout control device 311. Is output to In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 is unnecessary.

  The payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are respectively housed in board boxes 315, 316, 317, 318 made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, similarly to the main control device 261 described above, the box base and the box cover constituting the substrate box 315 (encapsulation means) are unopenably connected by the sealing unit 319 (sealing means). Seals the substrate box 315. The discharge control device 441 is housed in the substrate box 315 together with the payout control device 311, but may be housed separately in another substrate box.

  The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321. For example, if the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a clogged ball of the dispensing motor unit occurs, the dispensing motor rotates forward and reverse to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state). Has become.

  The discharge control device 441 is also provided with a state return switch 442 configured similarly to the state return switch 321. Thus, when the state return switch 442 is pressed when a discharge error such as a clogged ball of the discharge motor 432 occurs, the discharge motor 432 is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state). It has become.

  The power supply 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323. The pachinko machine 10A has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the state at the time of the power failure is maintained, and when returning from the power failure (power recovery), it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. Has become. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored and stored. Therefore, when returning to the initial state when the power is turned on, the power is turned off while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. It is to be introduced.

  The mounting table 301 is made of, for example, a colorless and transparent resin molded product, and has a flat board mounting surface 302 on the surface thereof. In this case, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are directly mounted side by side on the board mounting surface 302 of the mounting base 301, and the payout control device 311 is mounted on the board box 317 of the power supply device 313. Have been.

  The mounting base 301 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 305 at the right end portion in FIG. 19 and the like. By inserting the support shaft 305 from above into the support hole 237 shown in FIG. The two control board unit 202 is supported on the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. The mounting base 301 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nail latches 306 as fasteners at the left end, and the second control board unit 202 is inserted into the fastening holes 239 shown in FIG. It is fixed to the frame 12 so that it cannot be opened and closed. Note that the support hole 237 and the support shaft 305 correspond to the support shaft M4 in FIG. 10, and the fastening hole 239 and the nail latch 306 correspond to the fastening portion M5.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. The back pack unit 203 integrates a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism 352 for playing balls, and a front view of the back pack unit 203 is shown in FIG. 22, and an exploded perspective view is shown in FIG. Show.

  The back pack 351 is integrally molded of, for example, an ABS resin, and has a substantially flat base portion 353 and a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has at least a size sufficient to surround the variable display device unit 35 (however, in the present embodiment, the sound The lamp control device 262 is also enclosed). A large number of ventilation holes 354a are provided on the back surface of the protective cover 354. Each of the ventilation holes 354a has a long hole shape, and is provided so that the respective ventilation holes 354a are adjacent to each other at a relatively close position. Therefore, by cutting the resin portion between the adjacent ventilation holes 354a, the back surface of the back pack 351 can be easily opened. That is, by cutting the resin portion between the ventilation holes 354a and exposing the display control device 45 and the like inside the resin portion, a predetermined test or the like can be easily performed. The back pack 351 corresponds to a support member in the present invention.

  The dispensing mechanism 352 is provided on the base 353 so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided at the top of the back pack 351, and game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two rows (two rows) of ball passages and having a gentle inclination toward the downstream side is connected. The case rail 357 is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and pays out a required number of game balls appropriately by a predetermined electric configuration such as a payout motor. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 through a payout passage 359 shown in FIG.

  The tank rail 356 and the vibrator 360 for applying vibration to the tank rail 356 are unitized so as to be integrated. That is, the vibrator 360 is fastened and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Further, the vibrator 360 is not in surface contact with the tank rail 356 but in contact with the two screws, so that the vibration from the vibrator 360 is transmitted to the tank rail 356 more effectively. ing. Therefore, if a ball jam occurs near the tank rail 356, the ball jam is eliminated by driving the vibrator 360. The vibrator 356 is composed of a motor that is driven to rotate, and an unbalanced weight that is eccentrically rotated by the rotation of the motor (both are not shown). The motor rotates so that the tank rail 356 vibrates up and down. The shaft is provided along the tank rail 356. This vibrator 360 corresponds to the stress generating means in the present invention.

  The configuration of the tank rail 356 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 24, the tank rail 356 has a rail main body 361 having a long gutter shape opened upward. The rail main body 361 is formed so as to be divided into an upstream side and a downstream side with respect to the direction in which the game ball flows down. In the tank rail 356, reference numeral 361A is an upstream rail which is a separately formed upstream rail body, and reference numeral 361B is a downstream rail which is a separately formed downstream rail body. The length of the upstream rail 361A in the direction in which the game ball flows down is shorter than that of the downstream rail 361B. The vibrator 360 is attached to the upstream rail 361A so as to vibrate the upstream rail 361A whose length is shorter (see FIG. 22).

  A spherical ball receiving portion 362 is provided at the start end of the upstream rail 361A. By this ball receiving portion 362, the game ball dropped from the tank 355 is smoothly taken into the upstream rail 361A. Further, a partition wall 363 extending in the longitudinal direction is provided on the downstream rail 361B, and the game ball is divided into two hands by the partition wall 363. The two ball passages partitioned by the partition wall 363 are slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. On the bottom surface of each ball passage divided by the partition wall 363, one or two protrusions 364 are provided, and an opening 365 is provided on the side of the protrusion 364.

  In addition, a rectifying plate 367 is disposed on the downstream rail 361B so as to cover about half of the ceiling on the downstream side. The current plate 367 has an arcuate shape so as to limit the height of the ball passage in the tank rail 356 toward the downstream side, and a convex portion 368 extending in the longitudinal direction is formed on the lower surface thereof. . As a result, each game ball flowing in the tank rail 356 finally flows out downstream without being stacked vertically. Therefore, even if a large amount of game ball groups flow into the tank rail 356, biting of the game ball is prevented, and clogging of the ball in the tank rail 356 is eliminated. Note that the rail main body 361 including the upstream rail 361A and the downstream rail 361B is formed of a black conductive polycarbonate resin, whereas the rectifying plate 367 is formed of a transparent polycarbonate resin. The current plate 367 is detachably provided, and maintenance inside the tank rail 356 can be easily performed by removing the current plate 367.

  The downstream rail 361B is fastened and attached to the back pack 351 with, for example, screws. In addition, the upstream rail 361A vibrates up and down due to the vibrator 360. In order to easily vibrate the upstream rail 361A up and down, the upstream rail 361A and the back pack 351 are configured as shown in FIG. That is, the back pack 351 supports both ends on the downstream side and the upstream side of the upstream rail 361A with the two pins 369. More specifically, it is supported by a pin 369 at the downstream end so as to be vertically displaceable, and is fixed at the upstream end and supported by the pin 369. That is, it is swingably supported with the fixedly supported upstream end as a fulcrum. This pin 369 corresponds to the insertion member in the present invention.

  At each location corresponding to the portion through which the pin 369 is inserted, the back pack 351 is provided with insertion holes 370 and 371, and the upstream rail 361A is also provided with insertion holes 372 and 373. Of the insertion holes 370 and 371 provided in the back pack 351, the upstream insertion hole 370 is a round hole, and the downstream insertion hole 371 is a substantially elliptical hole. Therefore, the insertion hole 371 on the downstream side has a shape in which the width in the vertical direction is longer than the width in the horizontal direction. On the other hand, the insertion holes 372 and 373 provided in the upstream rail 361A are both round holes. The head of the pin 369 is formed in a substantially circular shape, and is formed larger than the round holes of the insertion holes 370, 372, and 373.

  At the end on the upstream side, the head of the pin 369 is formed to be wider in the horizontal and vertical directions than the insertion hole 370 provided in the back pack 351 and the insertion hole 372 provided in the upstream rail 361A. become. At the downstream end, the head of the pin 369 is formed wider in both the horizontal and vertical directions than the insertion hole 373 provided in the upstream rail 361A. Then, the head of the pin 369 is formed to be wider than the horizontal width of the insertion hole 371 which is a substantially elliptical hole provided in the back pack 351 as shown in FIG. It will be formed narrower than the width.

  Returning to the description of FIGS. 22 and 21, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 352, and a main power supply is taken in from outside. The power switch board 382 is installed. Main power of, for example, 24 V AC is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  The dispensing mechanism 352 from the tank 355 to the dispensing passage 359 is formed of a conductive resin material (for example, a conductive polycarbonate resin), and a part thereof is grounded. Thereby, generation of noise due to charging of the game ball is suppressed.

  The back pack 351 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 385 at the right end portion in FIG. 22 and the like. By inserting the support shaft 385 into the support hole 238 shown in FIG. The pack unit 203 is supported on the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Further, the back pack 351 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nip latches 386 as fasteners at the left end and locking holes 387 at the upper end, so that the ny latch 386 is inserted into the fastening holes 240 shown in FIG. The back pack unit 203 is fixed to the inner frame 12 so that the back pack unit 203 cannot be opened and closed by fitting the fixing tool 242 shown in FIG. At this time, the back pack unit 203 is also fixed to the inner frame 12 by the fixtures 241 and 243 shown in FIG. In addition, the support hole 238 and the support shaft 385 correspond to the support shaft M6 in FIG. 10, the fastening hole 240 and the nip latch 386 correspond to the fastening portion M7, and the fixing tool 242 and the locking hole 387 correspond to the locking portion M8. Equivalent to. Further, the fixing tool 243 corresponds to the locking portion M9.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 22, an inner frame open detection switch 388 for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the output is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer for the inside of the hall (in the pachinko parlor).

  As shown in FIG. 11, the back pack unit 203 is detachably attached to the back surface of the inner frame 12 by the fastening holes 240 and the nip latch 386 and the fixtures 241 and 242. Since the fixtures 241 and 242 are used in this way, the weight of the game balls supplied to the tank 355 prevents the back pack unit 203 from coming off the inner frame 12.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the present pachinko machine 10A. The pachinko machine 10A includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a discharge control device 441, a firing control device 312, a display control device 45, a power supply device 313, and the like. Hereinafter, these devices will be individually described in detail.

  The main controller 261 of the pachinko machine 10A has a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 storing various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. A certain RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

  The RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned off, and the RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. A backup area 503a is provided in addition to a memory and an area for the backup.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10A is restored to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 35). Conversely, restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure and power-off). The same applies to the following power restoration process. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when a power failure occurs due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) in FIG. 35 is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to a CPU 501 including the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 is connected to a RAM erasure switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a display control device 45, and a switch group (not shown), which will be described later.

  The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loaned balls by a payout motor. The CPU 511 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 storing a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned off, similarly to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above. The RAM 513 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data and the like.

  The backup area 513a includes a stack pointer at power-off, each register, and the like, in order to return the state of the pachinko machine 10A to the state before the power-off at the time of power-on when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 35). Conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the power restoration process when the power is turned on. .

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 having the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. The RAM erasure switch circuit 543, the main control device 261, the firing control device 312, the payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515.

  The discharge control device 441 performs discharge control of paying out the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside of the lower plate 15 by the second discharge unit 421. The discharge control device 441 includes a CPU 443 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 444 storing a control program executed by the CPU 443, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 445 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port is connected to the CPU 443 having the ROM 444 and the RAM 445 via a bus line including an address bus and a data bus. A solenoid 425, a discharge operation unit 435, a discharge motor 432, a rotation detection sensor 433, a discharge ball count switch 434, and a payout control device 311 are connected to the input / output port.

  The ROM 444 stores programs such as a discharge control process to be described later, which is executed by the CPU 443. The RAM 445 stores the number of discharges input based on the operation of the discharge operation unit 435, the number of discharges detected by the rotation detection sensor 433 and the discharge ball count switch 434, and the like.

  The firing control device 312 permits or prohibits the firing of the game ball by the firing motor 229. The driving of the firing motor 229 is permitted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. More specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the fact that the player is touching the game ball firing handle 18 is detected by a sensor signal, and the firing is stopped. On condition that the firing stop switch is not operated, the firing motor 229 is driven, and the game ball is fired at an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball firing handle 18.

  The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 42 and the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 41. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, two output ports 528 and 529, and a bus. Lines 530 and 531 are provided. The input of the input port 527 is connected to the output of the main controller 261, and the output of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the image controller 526, and one of the output ports via the bus line 530. 528 are connected. The output of the output port 528 is connected to the second symbol display device 41 (display unit 43) and the sound lamp control device 262. An output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531. The output of the output port 529 is connected to the first symbol display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the first symbol display device 42 and the second symbol display device 41 based on the display command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes the various programs. Memory for

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the first symbol display device 42. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 524, the display content of the first symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 42. The image controller 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing to read out the first data. This is displayed on the symbol display device 42.

  The power supply unit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10A, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And a circuit 543. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24 volt power supply supplied from the outside and supplies a +12 V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a +5 V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. The + 12V power supply, the + 5V power supply, and the backup power supply are supplied to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The firing control device 312 is supplied with operating power (+ 12V power, + 5V power, etc.) via the payout control device 311.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMl terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power interruption) has occurred when this voltage falls below 22 volts. The power outage signal S1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal S1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the process at the time of the power failure (NMI interrupt process in FIG. 35).

  In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 keeps the output of the control system drive voltage of 5 volts normal for a period of time sufficient to execute the power failure process. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erasure switch 323 and clearing the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal S2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10A is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including the power-on due to the blackout), the data of the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. You.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 26, the first symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 42 is provided with three symbol columns L, M, and R of left, middle, and right. For each R, three symbols (first symbol: for example, special symbol) of an upper symbol, a middle symbol, and a lower symbol are variably displayed. In the present embodiment, a series of symbols is composed of a main symbol with numbers “0” to “9” and a sub symbol composed of a diamond-shaped symbol, in ascending or descending order of numerals. A main symbol is displayed, and a sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols to form a series of symbol rows L, M, and R. Then, the main symbol and the sub symbol are changed and displayed from top to bottom with periodicity.

  In such a case, in the left symbol row L, the series of symbols is displayed in descending order (that is, in the order of decreasing the number of the main symbol), and in the middle symbol row M and the right symbol row R, the series of symbols is similarly ascending. (That is, in order of increasing the number of the main symbol). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left symbol row L → the right symbol row R → the middle symbol row M, and at the time of the stop, the five effective lines on the first symbol display attack 42, namely, the upper line L1, the middle line L2, A special game video is displayed as a big hit if the main symbols are arranged in a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) in any of the lower line L3, the right ascending line L4, and the left ascending line L5. It has become.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10A configured as described above will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 performs a lottery (big hit lottery) of the first symbol display device 42 and the setting of symbol display using various kinds of counter information during a game. 27, as shown in FIG. 27, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery of the first symbol display device 42, a jackpot symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 42, The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 42 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variation pattern selection of the first symbol display device 42 Variation type counters CS1 and CS2 to be used, and left, middle, and right symbols used for setting each of the symbols in the left, middle, and right columns. Counter CL, CM, has been with the use of the CR. Each of the above-described counters is configured by a program executed by the CPU 501.

  Each time the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1 and CS2 are updated, "1" is added to the previous value (hereinafter referred to as "update"), and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. It is a counter. In addition, register values of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 501, and as a result, numerical values change randomly. Each counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503. Further, the RAM 503 is provided with a reserved ball storage area composed of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). The values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in chronological order in accordance with the winning history of the game ball.

  More specifically, the configuration is such that the jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by "1" within a range of "0" to "676", and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "676"). It has become. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once each time a timer interrupt occurs, and is updated again within the remaining time of the normal processing. . The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once every timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. The number of random hit values at the time of low probability and the high probability are set at two types. The number of random number values at the time of low probability is 2, and the value is “337,673”. Yes, the number of random number values that will be a big hit at high probability is 10, and the values are “67, 131, 199, 289, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661”. The high-probability time is a state in which a large probability is increased by a predetermined probability variation symbol and the subsequent large-hit probability is increased as added value, so-called “probable change”. It is the time when it is not such a probable change state.

  The jackpot symbol counter C2 determines the symbol when the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 42 is stopped at the time of the jackpot, and in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 42 has five effective lines, Since 10 specific symbols (main symbols) are set, 50 (0 to 49) counter values are prepared. That is, the big hit symbol counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in the range of 0 to 49 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 49). The big hit symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the reach random number counter C3 causes the final stop symbol to be shifted one position before and after the reach symbol after the reach has occurred. "Leach other than front and rear departure" that stops before and after and "complete departure" where no reach occurs are determined by lottery. The reach other than the front and rear deviation corresponds to the reach, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to the complete deviation. The reach of the lottery may be individually set according to the state of the lottery probability of the first symbol display device 42, the number of active balls at the start of the change, and the like. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33.

  One of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is, for example, sequentially added one by one within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The other fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”. The first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of the first symbol such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after reach occurs ( In the present embodiment, a finer pattern variation mode is determined, such as the elapsed time until the middle symbol (the middle symbol) stops (in other words, the number of variable symbols). Therefore, by combining these change type counters CS1 and CS2, a wide variety of change patterns can be easily realized. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by a combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the first symbol display device 42 determines the variation pattern when the variation of the first symbol starts.

  The left, middle, and right out-of-design counters CL, CM, and CR indicate the left-row first design, the middle-row first design, and the right-row first design when the jackpot lottery of the first design display device 42 is lost. This is for determining a stop symbol (outer symbol), and in each column, any one of the 20 first symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol is displayed. Are prepared. Each of the upper, middle, and lower symbols of the left symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CL, each of the upper, middle, and lower symbols of the middle symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CM, and the right symbol row is determined by the off symbol counter CR. The upper, middle, and lower symbols are determined.

  In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are updated randomly by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 501. That is, at the time of updating each of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the added result exceeds the maximum value, 20 is subtracted to determine the current value. Is done. The missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated in the normal processing so that the update timings do not overlap. It is stored in either the symbol buffer or the completely off symbol buffer. Then, when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation of the first symbol, any one of the buffer values of the out-of-order reach symbol buffer, the reach symbol buffer other than the out-of-order loss, and the completely out-of-order symbol buffer is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3. You.

  The size and range of each counter are merely examples, and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and that they are not synchronized in any case.

  Although illustration is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter, for example, which is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and is acquired when the game ball passes the left or right second starting port 34. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in a cycle of 2 msec in the present embodiment), and a power failure to the NMl terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by input of a signal. For convenience of explanation, here, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then a main process will be described.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example.

  In FIG. 33, first, in step S601, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Thereafter, in a step S602, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In the subsequent step S603, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are each incremented by one, and their counter values reach the maximum values (in the present embodiment, 676, 49, and 238, respectively). In each case, clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503.

  After that, in step S604, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning of the first opening 33. This start winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. In step S701, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 33 based on the detection information of the operating port switch 224. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting port 33, in a succeeding step S702, it is determined whether or not the number N of operation-reserved balls of the first symbol display device 42 is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined whether or not. The process proceeds to step S703 on condition that there is a prize in the first opening 33 and that the number N of active balls is smaller than 4, and the number N of active balls is incremented by one.

  In the following step S704, a random number related to the first symbol hit is acquired. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S603 are stored in the first of the free storage areas of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. After performing the start winning process in this way, the CPU 501 once ends the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Due to this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 when power is turned off is stored in backup area 503a of RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. The NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 35 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main control device 261. For a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main control device 261 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt process is executed within the predetermined time.

  In the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 35, first, in step S801, the used register is saved in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503, and in the following step S802, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 503a. Further, in step S803, the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a. In step S804, a power-off notification command indicating that the power-off has been performed is transmitted to another control device.

  In step S805, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. In step S806, RAM access is prohibited. Thereafter, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for a complete shutdown of the power supply and the inability to execute processing.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10A is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMl terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 suspends the control being executed. 35 to start the NMI interrupt process of FIG. The contents are as described with reference to FIG. 35 (however, in the NMI interrupt process of the payout control device 311, the power-off notification command in step S804 is not transmitted).

Next, the main processing will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. The main process is started by a reset at the time of power-on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (the sound lamp control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like) to become operable, for example, The wait process is executed for about one second. In step S102, a payout permission command is transmitted to the payout control device 311. In step S103, RAM access is permitted.

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 has been pressed down (ON). In subsequent step S105, the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Is determined. In step S106, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in the following step S107, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503. The validity of the backup can be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10A, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S114 and the like). Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process similarly shifts to the initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S114 and the like). That is, in step S114, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in step S115, initialization processing of the RAM 503 is executed. In step S116, interruption permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erasure switch 323 is not pressed, the power recovery occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, and the power recovery Execute processing (processing at the time of power-off recovery). That is, in step S108, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S109, the power-off occurrence information is cleared. In step S110, a command for causing the sub-side control device to return to the gaming state when the power is turned off is transmitted, and in step S111, the use register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Further, in steps S112 and S113, after the interruption permission / non-permission is restored to the state before the power-off, the process returns to the address before the power-off, and then proceeds to a normal process described later (see FIG. 29). For example, when the power is turned off after the processing is executed up to step S202 of the normal processing, the address returns to the address before the power is turned off, and the processing is executed from step S203 of the normal processing.

  Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this normal processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing in steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In FIG. 29, first, in step S201, the output data such as the command updated in the previous processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of prize detection information is determined, and if there is prize detection information, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the acquired number of game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. In addition, when the first symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the first symbol, a stop symbol command, a variation pattern command, a determination command, and the like are transmitted to the display control device 45. After the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol, the fluctuation pattern command → the stop symbol command of the left symbol column → the stop symbol command of the right symbol column → the stop symbol command of the middle symbol column, one by one for each normal processing ( That is, one command is transmitted every 4 msec), and a fixed command is transmitted at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

  Next, in step S202, the update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In a succeeding step S203, the respective out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, and CR of the left symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the right symbol row are updated.

  The update process of each of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 30, in step S301, it is determined whether it is time to update the missing symbol counter CL in the left symbol row, and in step S302, It is determined whether it is time to update the symbol counter CM out of the middle symbol row. If it is time to update the left symbol row (YES in step S301), the flow advances to step S303 to update the left symbol row out-of-design counter CL. If the middle symbol row is updated (YES in step S302), the flow advances to step S304 to update the out-of-center symbol row symbol counter CM. Further, if the right symbol row is updated (NO in steps S301 and S302), the process proceeds to step S305 to update the out-of-design symbol CR in the right symbol example. In updating the out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S303 to S305, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 20 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the maximum value. The calculation result is used as the present value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

  According to the updating process of the CL, CM, and CR, the out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, and CR of the left symbol column, the middle symbol column, and the right symbol column are sequentially updated one by one in one normal process. The values are not updated at the same time. Thus, every time the normal process is executed three times, the set of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated.

  After that, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the updated combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of the reach symbols. It is determined whether or not it is out of reach. If the out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of out-of-front and out-of-reach reach, the process proceeds to step S306, and the combination of the out-of-design symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the out-of-front-out-of-front reach symbol buffer of the RAM 503. If the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of reach other than front and rear deviations, the process proceeds to step S309, and the combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the reach symbol buffer of the RAM 503 other than the front and rear deviations. .

  Also, in the case of a combination other than the reach symbol, in step S310, it is determined whether or not the combination of the missing symbols counter CL, CM, CR is a combination of the missing symbols. The process proceeds to step S311, and the combination of the lost symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the lost symbol buffer of the RAM 503. If both steps S306 and S310 are NO, the symbols are aligned on the left, center and right, that is, it corresponds to a jackpot state. In such a case, the missing symbol counters CL, CM and CR are stored in the buffer. This processing is terminated without any processing.

  After the update process of the out-of-design symbol counter, in step S204 of FIG. 29, the prize ball count signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 are read. After that, in step S205, a first symbol variation process for performing the variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 42 is executed. By the first symbol variation process, a jackpot determination, a variation pattern setting of the first symbol, and the like are performed. However, the details of the first symbol change process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S206, a special winning opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the special winning opening of the variable winning device 35 in the case of the jackpot state is executed. That is, the special winning opening is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the special winning opening has elapsed or whether a specified number of game balls have been won in the special winning opening. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening is closed. At this time, the continuous opening of the special winning opening is permitted on condition that the game ball has passed through the specific area, and this is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

  In step S207, display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41 is executed. Briefly, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the second starting port 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and the second symbol random number counter C4 is displayed on the display unit 43 of the second symbol display device 41. A symbol change display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the first opening 33 is opened for a predetermined time. Although not described, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33, similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. I have.

  Thereafter, in step S208, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the update of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S209 and S210). That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In step S210, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by one, and are cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random. .

  Next, the first symbol change process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In FIG. 31, in a step S401, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently occurring. The big hit includes a special game displayed on the first symbol display device 42 during the big hit and a predetermined time after the end of the special game. In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the first symbol display device 42 is performing the variable display of the first symbol. Then, when it is not during the big hit or the fluctuating display of the first symbol, the process proceeds to step S403, and it is determined whether or not the number N of operation pending balls of the first symbol display device 42 is larger than zero. At this time, if it is a big hit or the number N of operation-reserved balls is 0, the present process is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the jackpot or during the fluctuation display of the first symbol and if the number of operation-reserved balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the number N of pending operation balls is decremented by one. In step S405, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved sphere storage area to the execution area side. The first reserved area → the execution area, the second reserved area → The data in each area is shifted in such a manner as the reserved first area, the reserved third area → the reserved second urea, the reserved fourth area → the reserved third area, and so on.

  Thereafter, in step S406, a fluctuation start process is executed. Here, the details of the change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. In step S501, it is determined whether or not a big hit is based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. I do. Specifically, whether or not a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the jackpot random number counter value and the mode at each time. As described above, at the time of a normal low probability, among the values 0 to 676 of the jackpot random number counter C1, “337, 673 "is a hit value, and at the time of high probability," 67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661 "is a hit value.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot, in step S502, a symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, a table not showing the jackpot symbol (the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2) And a symbol representing the correspondence between the symbols and the symbol. At this time, the numerical values 0 to 49 of the jackpot symbol counter C2 correspond to any of the 50 jackpot symbols on all five activated lines, and any of the 50 jackpot symbols is set in the stop symbol command. Is done. When these jackpot symbols are aligned with a predetermined specific symbol, the state shifts to the probable change state, but when the symbols are aligned with non-specific symbols (non-specific symbols), the state does not shift to the probable change state.

  Next, in step S503, a fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is set as a fluctuation pattern command. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, the reach of the first symbol such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. The type and other rough symbol variation modes are determined, and the elapsed time (in other words, the middle symbol> in this embodiment) until the final stop symbol is stopped after occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 (in other words, The relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern, and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time are respectively determined. Are specified in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that it is not a jackpot, in step S504, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. In the case of the occurrence of the reach, it is further determined in step S505 whether or not the reach is out of front and rear based on the value of the reach random number counter C3. In the present embodiment, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is any one of 0 to 238, of which “0, 1” corresponds to the out-of-order reach, “2 to 21” corresponds to the reach other than the out-of-order reach, “22 to 238” corresponds to no reach (completely out of reach).

  In the case of the out-of-front / rear-reach occurrence, the process proceeds to step S506, and the respective values of the left / middle / right out-of-rear symbol counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the front / rear out-of-reach reach symbol buffer are set in the stop symbol command. In step S507, a fluctuation pattern at the time of the out-of-front-reach reach is determined, and the fluctuation pattern is set as a fluctuation pattern command. At this time, as in step S503, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are performed. In addition to determining the reach type of the first symbol and other rough symbol variations, the final stop symbol (middle symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. More detailed symbol variation mode, such as the elapsed time (in other words, the number of variable symbols), is determined.

  In the case of occurrence of a reach other than the front and rear deviation, the process proceeds to step S508, and the values of the left, middle, and right deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the RAM 503 non-back and forth non-reach symbol buffer are stopped symbol commands. Set to. In step S509, a variation pattern at the time of the reach other than the deviation from the front and rear is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command. At this time, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 in the same manner as in step S503 and the like.

  If it is neither a jackpot nor a reach, the process proceeds to step S510, and the respective values of the left, middle, and right missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the completely missing symbol buffer of the RAM 503 are set as stop symbol commands. In step S611, a variation pattern at the time of complete departure is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command. At this time, since the reach does not occur, the interest of the player is weakened, and various symbol change modes are not required. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S511, the symbol variation type is determined using only the first variation type counter CS1 (that is, without using the second variation type counter CS2). As described above, when the setting of the symbol stop command and the variation pattern command is completed at the time of the big hit, at the time of the occurrence of the reach, and at the time of the non-occurrence of the reach, the present process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 31, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the fluctuation display of the first symbol is being performed, the process proceeds to step S407, and it is determined whether the fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, the fluctuating time of the first symbol is determined according to the fluctuating pattern of the first symbol, and when this fluctuating time has elapsed, a positive determination is made in step S407. Then, in step S408, a fluctuation stop command is set as a fixed command, and then the present process is terminated.

  Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311. This main processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S901, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S902, the process waits until a payout permission command transmitted from main controller 261 is received. When the payout permission command is received, the process proceeds to step S903 to permit RAM access, and sets an external interrupt vector in step S904.

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 513 in the CPU 511. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 has been pressed down (ON). In subsequent step S906, the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Is determined. In step S907, a RAM determination value is calculated, and in the following step S908, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 513. The validity of the backup can be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

  If the RAM erase switch 523 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S915 and the like). Also, when the power-off information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (such as a checksum value), the process also proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 (step S915 and the like). That is, in step S915, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step S916, the RAM 513 is initialized. In step S917, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S918, interrupt permission is set, and the flow advances to a payout control process described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the power recovery occurrence information is set, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, and the power recovery Execute processing (processing at the time of power-off recovery). That is, in step S909, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S910, the information of the occurrence of the power-off is cleared. In step S911, CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S912, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in steps S913 and S914, the interrupt permission / non-permission is restored to the state before the power was turned off, and then the process returns to the address before the power was turned off.

  Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In FIG. 37, in step S1001, a command from the main control device 261 is obtained, and the total number of winning balls is stored. In step S1002, the launch control is set for the launch control device 312. In step S1003, the state return switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed.

  After that, in step S1004, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the full state of the lower plate 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the setting of the lower plate full state is executed. Then, the lower plate full state release state is set. In step S1005, setting of a tank ball absence state or a tank ball absence release state is executed according to a change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the tank ball absence switch is determined by the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and when the tank ball is not present, the setting of the tank ball absence state is executed. Execute the settings.

  Thereafter, in step S1006, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified.

  In steps S1007 to S1009, a prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if it is not in the state of being unable to pay out a lending ball, and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not 0 (NO in steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to step S1009, and a prize ball control process (described later) 38) is started. If the prize ball cannot be paid out, or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (either step S1007 or S1008 is YES), the process shifts to a ball lending payout process.

  Thereafter, in steps S1010 to S1012, a process for paying out a ball is executed. In this case, if it is not in the state of being unable to pay out a lending ball, and if a lending ball payout request is received from the card unit (NO in step S1010, YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012, and a ball lending control process (described later). FIG. 39) is started. In addition, if the ball cannot be paid out or the ball rental request has not been received (step S1010 is YES or S1011 is NO), the subsequent ball-pulling process is executed.

  In step S1013, the state return switch 321 is checked to determine that the ball is not in the ball-pulling disabled state, and that the ball-playing operation is not started, and the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball-playing process. In subsequent step S1014, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the top of the main payout control process.

  Here, in the prize ball control processing shown in FIG. 38, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the prize ball payout. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, in which the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed, and thereafter, the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and it is determined whether or not the game balls are normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1105, in which the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and thereafter, the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  If the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the count of the game balls by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1107, and thereafter, the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  In the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 39, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the payout of the ball for rental. In the following step S1202, whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal or not is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, in which the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process, a process of stopping the payout motor 358a is performed, and thereafter, the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined whether or not the game balls are normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1205, in which the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and thereafter, the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

  Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the count of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rental balls (25) and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1207, and thereafter, the process returns to the payout control process in the figure.

  Next, the flow of the discharge control process executed by the CPU 443 of the discharge control device 441 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a main process performed by the discharge control device 441. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing by the discharge control device 441. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the discharge number setting process. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the discharge motor driving process. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an error notification process by the discharge control device 441, and FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a state return process by the discharge control device 441. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the discharge stop interrupt processing.

  In FIG. 40, a main process executed by the CPU 443 in the discharge control device 441 is activated by a reset at power-on.

  In step S1311, initialization processing accompanying power-on is performed. In step S1312, interruption permission is set.

  In FIG. 41, the CPU 443 in the discharge control device 441 executes a timer interrupt process, for example, every 2 msec.

  In step S1321, the CPU 443 determines whether the pressing of the setting buttons 435a and 435b is detected. If it is determined that the pressing of the setting buttons 435a and 435b has been detected, the process proceeds to step S1322. In step S1322, the CPU 443 performs a discharge number setting process described later. If the pressing of the setting buttons 435a and 435b is not detected, the process advances to step S1323.

  In step S1323, CPU 443 determines whether or not pressing of start button 435c has been detected. If it is determined that the pressing of the start button 435c has been detected, the process proceeds to step S1324. In step S1324, the CPU 443 performs a discharge motor driving process described later. If the press of the start button 435c is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1325.

  In step S1325, the CPU 443 performs a discharge error notification process described later. Next, in step S1326, CPU 443 determines whether or not depression of state return switch 442 has been detected. If the depression of the state return switch 442 is detected, the process proceeds to step S1327. In step S1327, the CPU 443 performs a state return process described later. If the pressing of the state return switch 442 is not detected, the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 42, a discharge number setting process performed by the CPU 443 will be described.

  In step S1331, the CPU 443 determines whether or not the discharge flag is 1. The CPU 443 sets a discharge flag to 1 when the discharge motor 432 is driven and sets a discharge flag to 0 when the discharge motor 432 is stopped in a discharge motor driving process described later. If it is determined that the discharge flag is 1, the present process ends. If it is determined that the discharge flag is 0, the process advances to step S1332.

  In step S1332, the CPU 443 determines whether the pressing of the setting button 435a (referred to as the + button 435a in this process) is detected. In this embodiment, for example, every time the + button 435a is pressed once, a set number of discharges of +10 balls is input, as will be described later. It should be noted that it may be possible to continuously input the set number of discharges by continuously pressing the + button 435a. If the press of the + button 435a is detected, the process advances to step S1333. If the press of the + button 435a is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1336 described below.

  In step S1333, the CPU 443 determines whether or not the set number input by pressing the + button 435a exceeds the upper limit. The upper limit of the set number is, for example, 100 balls. Note that the hall (pachinko parlor) may be configured such that the upper limit number can be arbitrarily set according to the number of exchanges with food and drink. If it is determined that the set number does not exceed the upper limit, the set number is incremented by +10 in step S1334, and the process proceeds to step S1335. If it is determined that the set number exceeds the upper limit, the process skips step S1334 and proceeds to step S1335. In step S1335, the CPU 443 displays the current set number on the discharge indicator 436.

  If it is determined in step S1332 that the pressing of the + button 435a is not detected, it is determined in step S1336 whether the pressing of the setting button 435b (referred to as the-button 435b in this process) is detected. In this embodiment, as will be described later, each time the-button 435b is pressed once, the set number of discharges of -10 balls is input corresponding to the + button 435a. If the press of the -button 435b is detected, the process advances to step S1337. If the press of the -button 435b is not detected, the process ends.

  In step S1337, it is determined whether or not the number of settings that has been negatively input by pressing the-button 435b is below the lower limit value, that is, 0. If it is determined that the set number is not less than the lower limit, the set number of discharges is set to -10, and the process proceeds to step S1338. If it is determined that the set number is lower than the lower limit, the process skips step S1338 and proceeds to step S1335 to display the current set number of discharges.

  With reference to FIG. 43, a discharge motor driving process performed by the CPU 443 will be described.

  In step S1341, it is determined whether or not the lower ball flag is 1. The lower bowl flag 1 indicates that gaming balls are stored in the lower bowl 15, and 0 indicates that gaming balls are not stored in the lower bowl 15. Whether or not game balls are stored in the lower plate 15 is determined, for example, by providing a sensor for detecting game balls near the second discharge port 422a and determining whether or not the sensor detects game balls. Can be considered. If the lower bowl flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S1342, and the second opening / closing member 424 is opened. When the lower ball flag is 0, since the game balls are hardly stored in the lower plate 15, the present process is terminated.

  In step S1343, it is determined whether or not the number of retries described later exceeds three. If it is determined that the number of retries does not exceed three, the process advances to step S1344 to drive the discharge motor 432. The CPU 443 sets the discharge flag to 1 when driving the discharge motor 432. Next, in step S1345, CPU 443 determines whether or not a retry flag described later is “1”. If the retry flag is not 1, the CPU 443 stores the set number input from the discharge operation unit 435 in the storage area a of the RAM 445 (step S1346), and stores the estimated discharge number derived from the detection value of the rotation detection sensor 433 in the RAM 445. (Step S1347), and the actual discharge number derived from the detection value of the discharge ball count switch 434 is stored in the storage area c of the RAM 445 (step S1348).

  Here, each time the discharge of the game ball is detected from the discharge count switch 434, the CPU 443 decrements the set number stored in the RAM 445 by one, and displays the reduced number on the discharge display 436. Make a notification. That is, when the discharge of the game ball from the second discharge unit 421 is started, the discharge indicator 436 performs a countdown notification in which the set number displayed on the discharge display 436 decreases by one. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 only by looking at the discharge indicator 436 without checking the inside of the lower plate 15. The emission notification is not limited to the countdown method in which the set number is subtracted by one, but may be a method in which the emission number is counted up by one, or a notification using a graph indicating an increase or decrease in the number of emissions.

  Next, in step S1349, the CPU 443 performs the calculation of ab using the values of the storage areas a and b described above, and determines whether or not the calculation result is 0. That is, the CPU 443 determines whether or not the number obtained by subtracting the estimated number of emissions from the set number is 0. If it is not 0, it indicates that the set number of game balls have not been discharged. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1350, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the discharge motor 432 started driving. If it is determined to be 0, the process skips step S1350 and proceeds to step S1351.

  Next, in step S1350, CPU 443 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since driving of discharge motor 432 was started. If it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the CPU 443 stops the discharge motor 432 and returns the discharge flag from 1 to 0. If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S1347, and the processing from step S1347 to step S1350 is repeated.

  Next, in step S1352, the CPU 443 performs the calculation of bc, stores the calculation result in the storage area d of the RAM 445, and determines whether the value stored in the storage area d is 0. That is, the CPU 443 determines whether or not a value obtained by subtracting the actual discharge number from the estimated discharge number (that is, the discharge shortage number) is 0. If it is determined that the number of shortfalls is not 0 (there is insufficient discharge), the process proceeds to step S1353, and if it is determined that the number of shortfalls is 0 (all have been discharged), the process proceeds to step S1357.

  In step S1353, to perform the retry process, the CPU 443 sets the retry flag to 1 and clears the values of b and c. Next, in step S1354, the CPU 443 performs a vibration process for giving vibration to the second discharge rail 429. This is to eliminate clogging of the ball in the second discharge rail 429. Next, the CPU 443 repeats the processing from step S1341 to step S1352 described above. However, in step S1345, when the retry flag is 1 (step S1345: Yes), the value of a (set number) is replaced with the value of d (number of insufficient discharges). In step S1349, it is determined that “ab = 0” is “db = 0”. If the number of retries exceeds three in step S 1343 (step S 1343: Yes), the process proceeds to step S 1356, sets the error flag to 1, and ends the process. The error flag triggers an error notification process described later.

  In step S1357, when it is determined in step S1352 that "bc" is 0 (all have been discharged), the CPU 443 determines whether the error flag is 1. If it is determined that the error flag is not 1, the process proceeds to step S1359. If it is determined that the error flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S1358, the error flag is set to 0, and the process proceeds to step S1359. As described above in steps S 1343 and S 1356, if the number of retries exceeds three, the error flag is set to 1 and this processing ends, but there are cases where the number of retries is cleared by the state return processing described later. is there. When the number of retries is cleared, the discharge motor driving process from step S1343 to step S1352 can be executed again. This is the case where the error flag is determined to be 1 in step S1357.

  Next, in step S1359, CPU 443 determines whether or not the retry flag is 1. If the process has proceeded to step S1357 without going through the above-described steps S1353 and S1354, it is determined that the retry flag is 0, and the process proceeds to step S1361. If the process proceeds to step S1357 after the above-described steps S1353 and S1354, the retry flag is determined to be 1, so the process proceeds to step S1360, returns the retry flag to 0, and proceeds to step S1361. In step S1361, the second opening / closing member 424 is closed, and the process ends.

  An error notification process performed by the CPU 443 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1371, the CPU 443 determines whether the error flag is “1”. If it is determined that the error flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S1372. In step S1372, CPU 443 determines whether or not the error notification flag is 1. If the error notification flag is not 1, the CPU 443 sets the error notification flag to 1 and executes error notification. The error notification is to change the color of the display screen of the discharge indicator 436 from green to orange as described above. If the error notification flag is 1, the error notification is being performed, and the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1371 that the error flag is not 1, the process proceeds to step S1374. In step S1374, CPU 443 determines whether or not the error notification flag is 1. If the error notification flag is 1, the CPU 443 sets the error notification flag to 0 since the error has already been resolved, and ends the error notification. That is, by changing the color of the display screen of the discharge indicator 436 from orange to green, it is notified that the discharge error has been corrected. If the error notification flag is not 1, the CPU 443 terminates this processing as it is.

  With reference to FIG. 45, the state return processing performed by the CPU 443 will be described.

  In step S1381, since the CPU 443 has already received the signal indicating that the press of the state return switch 442 has been detected, the CPU 443 rotates the discharge motor 432 in the forward and reverse directions in order to eliminate the ball clogging. In step S1382, the CPU 443 clears the number of retries in order to perform the discharge motor driving process after eliminating the ball clogging, and ends the process.

  With reference to FIG. 46, the discharge stop interrupt processing performed by the CPU 443 will be described.

  The discharge stop interruption process is a process that occurs when the player presses the stop button 435d to stop the discharge operation. When the player presses the stop button 435d, an interrupt signal for performing this processing is output to the CPU 443.

  In step S1391, the CPU 443 determines whether or not pressing of the stop button 435d has been detected. Specifically, the CPU 443 determines whether or not the interrupt signal has been received. If the press of the stop button 435d is detected, the flow proceeds to step S1392. If the pressing of the stop button 435d is not detected, the process ends.

  In step S1392, the CPU 443 determines whether the discharge flag is “1”. If it is determined that the discharge flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S1393, and if it is determined that the discharge flag is not 1, the process ends. In step S1393, the CPU 443 detects whether or not ten game balls have been ejected from the time point when the stop button 435d is pressed, and repeats this processing until ten game balls are detected. This is because, in the present embodiment, the discharge of the game balls is set in units of 10 balls, and the game balls are discharged in units of 10 balls. When the unit of the set number and the unit of the number of discharges change, the number of game balls determined in step S1393 also changes accordingly. If it is detected that ten game balls have been discharged from the time point when the stop button 435d is pressed, the process proceeds to step S1394. In step S1394, the discharge flag is set to 0, and the discharge motor 432 is stopped. Thus, the present process ends. When the discharge flag becomes 0, the above-described discharge number setting processing can be performed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned game ball is equivalent to the game medium of the present invention. Further, the above-described dispensing device 358 corresponds to the dispensing unit of the present invention, the lower plate 15 corresponds to the storing unit of the present invention, and the first discharge unit 411 corresponds to the first extracting unit or the first discharging unit of the present invention. The second discharging unit 421 corresponds to a second extracting unit or a second discharging unit of the present invention. The first outlets 412a and 412b correspond to a first outlet of the present invention, and the second outlets 422a and 422b correspond to a second outlet of the present invention. In addition, the rotation detection sensor 433 and the discharge count switch 434 correspond to a discharge detection unit of the present invention. Further, the discharge operation unit 435 corresponds to a discharge operation unit of the present invention. The function of the CPU 443 causing the discharge indicator 436 to perform countdown notification corresponds to a discharge notification unit.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10A of the first embodiment, the payout device 358 that pays out game balls having a predetermined value, and the lower plate 15 that stores game balls that are paid out by the payout device 358, The plate 15 includes a first discharge unit 411 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside, and a second discharge unit 421 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside (for example, , Corresponding to the gaming machine described in A1 described above). Since the lower plate 15 is provided with two discharge units, the first discharge unit 411 and the second discharge unit 421, two types of discharge can be realized for the game balls stored in the lower plate 15. That is, discharge for discharging the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 to a storage container called a dollar box or the like, and discharge for other uses. Accordingly, in a case other than the case where the first discharge unit 411 is used, such as when the game ball is transferred to the dollar box, the player grasps the game ball from the lower plate 15 by hand, but takes out the second discharge unit. By using 421, a predetermined number of game balls can be easily taken out from the lower plate 15 even when the first discharge unit 411 is not used.

  In addition, the first discharge unit 411 discharges an arbitrary number of game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside, and the second discharge unit 421 outputs the game balls stored in the lower plate 15. Discharge a predetermined number of game balls to the outside. Thereby, the first discharge for discharging an arbitrary number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 to the dollar box and the predetermined number of game balls among the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 for the food and drink, etc. The second discharge performed for the purpose of replacement can be realized. As described above, since the predetermined number of game balls can be discharged to the outside by using the second discharge unit 421, the predetermined number of game balls can be easily taken out from the game balls paid out to the lower plate 15 by the payout device 358. it can.

  In addition, the first discharge unit 411 provides the lower plate 15 when the player finishes the game, for example, in a jackpot state where the player can obtain a greater number of game ball payouts than in the normal game state. Is used to discharge a game ball accommodated in a dollar box (corresponding to the gaming machine described in A2 described above). For example, even when the first discharging unit 411 is not used, such as when a big hit state or when a player ends a game, a predetermined number of game balls can be easily taken out from the lower plate 15.

  The second discharge unit 421 is disposed outside the center of the lower plate 15 when the pachinko machine 10A is viewed from the front (corresponding to the gaming machine described in A3 described above). Thereby, the player sitting on the chair of the pachinko machine 10A can easily receive the game ball discharged from the second discharge unit 421 by naturally extending the free hand forward.

  Further, when the pachinko machine 10A is viewed from the front, the second discharge unit 421 is disposed outside the center of the lower plate 15 from the position where the first discharge unit 411 is disposed (as described above). A4). Thereby, even if a dollar box containing game balls discharged from the first discharge unit 411 is arranged below the first discharge unit 411, the dollar box is discharged from the second discharge unit 421. Hard to get in the way of receiving the game ball. Therefore, the game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 can be easily received.

  The second discharge unit 421 discharges a smaller number of game balls than the number of game balls discharged by the first discharge unit 411 (corresponding to the gaming machine described in A5 described above). Thus, when a predetermined number of game balls are taken out of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15, if the second discharge unit 421 having a smaller number of discharges than the first discharge unit 411 is used, a predetermined number of game balls can be obtained. The operation of taking out the game balls becomes easier than using the first discharge unit 411, and it becomes easier to take out a predetermined amount of game media accurately.

  In addition, the first discharge unit 411 includes a first discharge port 412 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside, and the second discharge unit 421 outputs the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside. A second discharge port 422 configured to discharge and reduce the number of game balls discharged per unit time than the first discharge port 412 is provided (for example, the game machine described in A6 described above is supported). Do). According to such a configuration, the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422 per unit time is smaller than the number of game balls discharged from the first discharge port 412 per unit time. Since the configuration is such that the game balls are discharged from the second discharge port 422 rather than the game balls are discharged from the first discharge port 412, the work of taking out a predetermined number of game balls becomes easier. In addition, a predetermined number of game balls can be accurately taken out.

  In addition, the second discharge unit 421 includes a rotation detection sensor 433 for detecting the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422 and a discharge ball count switch 434 (for example, a game machine corresponding to A7 described above). Do). According to such a configuration, since the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422 is internally grasped by the rotation detection sensor 433 and the discharge ball count switch 434, the game balls are discharged from the second discharge port 422. The point in time when the number of game balls reaches a desired number can be easily detected.

  In addition, the CPU 443 of the discharge control device 441 notifies the player of the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421, which is detected by the rotation detection sensor 433 and the discharge count switch 434, as notification. A countdown notification for reducing the set number displayed on the discharge display 436 by one is displayed on the discharge display 436 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in A8 described above). This makes it easy to check the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 during the game.

  In addition, the second discharge unit 421 discharges a predetermined number of game balls, which are smaller than the number of game balls discharged by the first discharge port 412, to the outside (for example, as described above). A12). According to such a configuration, when the second discharge unit 421 discharges a part of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15, a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to the outside. Therefore, after the game balls are discharged from the lower plate 15 to the outside, the labor for adjusting the number of the game balls according to the number of the discharged game balls is reduced, so that the payout is performed by the payout control device 311. The task of the player taking out a predetermined amount of game balls from the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 is further facilitated.

  When the discharge ball count switch 434 detects that the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422 reaches a predetermined number, the discharge of the game balls from the second discharge port 422 is stopped. (For example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in A13 described above). According to such a configuration, when the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422 reaches a predetermined number, the discharge of game balls from the second discharge port 422 is stopped. A predetermined number of game media can be accurately discharged.

  In addition, the discharge operation unit 435 is configured to be able to change the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 discharged by the second discharge unit 421 in accordance with the operation of the player (for example, A15 described above). Corresponding to the described gaming machine). According to such a configuration, the number of game balls discharged by the second discharge unit 421 can be arbitrarily changed according to the operation of the player, and thus the number of exchanges of food and drink and game media provided by the game hall is provided. Can also be handled when a plurality of are set according to the type of food or drink.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10B according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10B according to the second embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 10B of the second embodiment has a different electrical configuration from the pachinko machine 10A of the first embodiment. That is, in the first embodiment, the discharge control device 441 performs the discharge number setting process, the discharge motor driving process, and the discharge error notification process, but in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 262 performs these processes. In the first embodiment, the set number is displayed on the discharge indicator 436, but in the present embodiment, the set number is displayed on the first symbol display device 42. The sound lamp control device 262 is also called a sub control device.

  Specifically, the audio lamp control device 262 includes a display control device 45 to which the speaker 25, the first symbol display device 42, and the like are connected, the annular illumination portion 102, the central illumination portion 103, and the upper plate illumination portion. Illumination parts such as 104, lamps such as the prize ball lamp 105 and the error display lamp 106, a discharge motor 432, a rotation detection sensor 433, a discharge count switch 434, and a discharge operation unit 435 are connected.

  The sound lamp control device 262 includes, for example, a CPU 551 that controls sound and lamp display and controls the display control device 45 according to instructions from the main control device 261, and also includes a ROM 552, a RAM 553, a bus line 554, an input / output port 555, and the like. An audio lamp control board is provided.

  The CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 has a function of executing a discharge number setting process, a discharge motor driving process, and a discharge error notification process. Specifically, the ROM 552 stores a program for a discharge number setting process, a discharge motor driving process, and a discharge error notification process executed by the CPU 551. The RAM 553 temporarily stores data such as the set number input based on the operation of the discharge operation unit 435 and the number of discharges detected by the rotation detection sensor 433 and the discharge count switch 434. The RAM 553 has a backup area 553a in addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data and the like.

  A solenoid 425, a discharge operation unit 435, a discharge motor 432, a rotation detection sensor 433, a discharge count switch 434, and the like are connected to the input / output port 555.

  Since the sound lamp control device 262 has a function of executing the discharge number setting process, the discharge motor driving process, and the discharge error notification process, it is not necessary to separately provide the discharge control device 441. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the substrate box 315 that houses the discharge control device 441 together with the payout control device 311. Further, when the discharge control device 441 is individually housed in another substrate box, the arrangement space of the mounting table 301 when the substrate box housing the discharge control device 441 can be reduced. In addition, since electronic components such as the CPU 443, the ROM 444, and the RAM 455 that constitute the discharge control device 441 are not required, costs for manufacturing a gaming machine can be reduced.

  Next, the flow of the discharge control process executed by the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main process executed by the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal process executed by the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing by the audio lamp control device 262.

  In FIG. 48, the main process is started by a reset at power-on.

  In step S1401, the CPU 551 of the sound lamp control device 262 executes an initial setting process when the power is turned on. Specifically, port setting (port I / O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 ms interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (sub-command strobe interrupt) are performed. .

  In step S1402, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 determines whether or not the power-off processing has not been completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not all the lamps (such as the annular illuminated portion 102 and the central illuminated portion 103) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10B are completely turned off and whether the speaker 25 is in a mute state. Is determined. If the power-off processing is not completed, the process proceeds to step S1404; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  Subsequently, in step S1403, the CPU 551 of the sound lamp control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM 553 of the sound lamp control device 262 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is broken, the process proceeds to step S1404; Proceed to. In step S1404, the CPU 551 of the audio ramp control device 262 performs a read / write check of the RAM area of the audio ramp control device 262. Then, in step S1405, the CPU 551 of the sound ramp control device 262 determines whether the RAM 553 of the sound ramp control device 262 is normal. If the RAM 553 of the sound ramp control device 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S1406, and if abnormal, the process proceeds to step S1412. In step S1406, the CPU 551 of the audio ramp control device 262 writes RAM destruction check data for each area of the RAM 553, and sets RAM destruction check data for determining that the data has been destroyed if there is a reading error. .

  Then, in step S1407, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 determines whether or not the power is turned on after the power is turned off. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1408; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1409.

  In step S1408, the CPU 551 of the audio ramp control device 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that becomes a problem in the system when data is cleared, and is an area of information that is desired to be retained except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, there are a subcommand reception buffer and power-on information. When the main control device 261 is turned off and the sound lamp control device 262 is reset (when a power-off notification command is received from the main control device 261), the RAM areas other than the unprocessed RAM area are cleared.

  In step S1409, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 sets interruption permission. In step S1410, the CPU 551 of the audio ramp control device 262 sets an initial value of the RAM 553 of the audio ramp control device 262. In step S1411, the CPU 551 of the sound lamp control device 262 sets the effect initialization flag to “1”, and proceeds to the normal processing shown in FIG.

  In step S1412, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs RAM abnormality notification and enters an infinite loop. For example, a notification such as turning on a predetermined lamp unconditionally is given.

  With reference to FIG. 49, the normal processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sound lamp control device 262 will be described.

  In step S1421, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1422; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1428.

  In step S1422, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs a lamp output process. Specifically, a lamp output is performed in accordance with the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the first symbol display device 42.

  In step S1423, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs power-on notification. Specifically, the notification is performed for 30 seconds by the power-on command.

  In step S1424, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, switching between a title and a still image is performed. That is, a so-called demonstration screen is displayed.

  In step S1425, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs a lamp editing process. Specifically, a process of editing a lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronous with) the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the first symbol display device 42 is performed.

  In step S1426, the CPU 551 of the sound lamp control device 262 performs sound editing / output processing. Specifically, a process of outputting a sound corresponding to (synchronizing) the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the first symbol display device 42 (sound, music, sound effect, or the like) is performed.

  In step S1427, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs a liquid crystal effect execution management process. More specifically, time management and the like for synchronizing the lamp, the sound, and the liquid crystal effect (the decorative pattern change pattern effect on the first symbol display device 42) are performed.

  In step S1428, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs a process of updating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be performed on the first symbol display device 42 and the value of the random number for determining the effect of the audio lamp. Specifically, the random number has a value of, for example, “0” to “32767”, and may return to “0” when the random number reaches the upper limit value “37268”.

  In step S1429, when the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 receives a command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 performs a process corresponding to each command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 receives the variation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the variation pattern designation command to a display command for transmitting to the display control device 45. Convert. Note that the variation pattern designation command may be output as it is through. Further, when the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 receives the decorative design specification command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 converts the decorative design specification command into a stop display command for transmitting to the display control device 45. . When the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 receives the complete stop command (confirmation command) from the main control device 261, it transmits this complete stop command to the display control device 45 as it is. When receiving the jackpot start command from the main controller 261, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp controller 262 converts the jackpot start command into a jackpot display command to be transmitted to the display controller 45.

  In step S1430, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs a command output process of outputting a command to the display control device 45 or the like. The CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 transmits various commands to the display control device 45, such as the above-described display command, stop display command, and jackpot display command.

  In step S1431, the CPU 551 of the sound ramp control device 262 determines whether the RAM 553 of the sound ramp control device 262 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 has not been destroyed, the process returns to step S1421, and if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process enters an infinite loop.

  In FIG. 50, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 executes a timer interrupt process, for example, every 2 msec.

  In step S1431, the CPU 551 determines whether the pressing of the setting buttons 435a and 435b is detected. If it is determined that the pressing of the setting buttons 435a and 435b has been detected, the process advances to step S1432. In step S1432, the CPU 551 performs the same processing as the discharge number setting processing described in the first embodiment. If the pressing of the setting buttons 435a and 435b is not detected, the process advances to step S1433.

  In this embodiment, since the CPU 551 of the sound lamp control device 262 performs the discharge number setting process, it is possible to cause the first symbol display device 42 to display the discharge number and the like set by the process. This makes it possible to check the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 in the area where the player is always closely watching during the game, and to determine the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 in the game. It is even easier to check inside.

  In step S1433, the CPU 551 determines whether pressing of the start button 435c has been detected. If it is determined that the start button 435c has been pressed, the process advances to step S1434. In step S1434, the CPU 551 performs the same processing as the discharge motor driving processing described in the first embodiment. If the press of the start button 435c is not detected, the process advances to step S1435.

  In step S1435, the CPU 551 performs the discharge error notification processing described in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, since the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 performs a discharge error notification process, an image indicating a discharge error can be displayed on the first symbol display device 42. This makes it possible to check for a discharge error in an area that is always closely watched during the game, and it is easy to check for the occurrence of a discharge error during the game. Note that the CPU 551 can output a sound indicating a discharge error from the speaker 25, and can perform lighting indicating the discharge error with the error display lamp 106.

  Next, in step S1436, the CPU 551 determines whether or not pressing of the state return switch 442 has been detected. If the depression of the state return switch 432 is detected, the process proceeds to step S1437. In step S1437, the CPU 551 performs the state return processing described in the first embodiment. If the pressing of the state return switch 442 is not detected, the process ends.

  In addition, when the player presses the stop button 435d, the CPU 551 executes the same processing as the discharge stop interrupt processing described in the first embodiment.

  The setting of the discharge number and the notification of the discharge error in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 51A to 51C are diagrams illustrating the display screen of the first symbol display device 42. FIGS. 51A to 51C are diagrams illustrating the discharge number setting display with time, and FIG. It is a figure explaining information.

  The state of discharge of the game balls by the second discharge unit 421 is notified to the player by information displayed on the first symbol display device 42. When displaying the discharge status of the game balls in the second discharge unit 421, the first symbol display device 42 displays discharge status information for notifying the discharge status of the game balls in the second discharge unit 421. A situation display area 438a, a set number display area 438b in which set number information notifying the number of set game balls is displayed, and a discharge number indicating discharge number information notifying the number of game balls being discharged. A display area 438c is provided.

  When the player operates the setting buttons 435a and 435b to set the number (for example, 40) of game balls to be discharged, the first symbol display device 42 displays a discharge status display area as shown in FIG. A character indicating that the setting is being performed (“discharge number is being set”) is displayed in 438a, and the set number (for example, “40”) is displayed in the set number display area 438b. When the player operates the start button 435c, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the second opening / closing member 424 is moved to the open position and the discharge motor 432 is driven to start discharging the game ball. On the first symbol display device 42, a character (“discharging”) indicating that the game ball is being discharged is displayed in the discharge status display area 438a. “40” is displayed in the set number display area 438b. In the number-of-discharges display area 438c, the number of discharges "1" is displayed when the discharge ball switch 434 detects the passage of the first game ball, and thereafter, every time a game ball is detected by the discharge count switch 434. Then, the display of the discharge number is increased by one until the set number is reached.

  When the set number of game balls have been discharged, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), a character indicating that the discharge has been completed (“discharge completed”) is displayed in the discharge status display area 438a. The number “40” is displayed in each of the set number display area 438b and the discharge number display area 438c. As a result, even during the game, since the information indicating that the discharge of the game ball has been completed is displayed at a position easily visible to the player, whether the discharge by the second discharge unit 421 is completed or not. There is no need to look down on the lower plate 15 to check whether or not it is possible to concentrate on the game.

  If a discharge error occurs during the discharge by the second discharge unit 421 (for example, when the discharge of 10 balls is detected), a discharge error is displayed in the discharge status display area 438a as shown in FIG. Is displayed, for example, such as "occurrence of discharge error". A number “40” is displayed in the set number display area 438b, and a number “10” is displayed in the number-of-discharges display area 438c, indicating that the discharge is in progress. This makes it possible to easily confirm that a discharge error has occurred in the middle of discharging by the second discharging unit 421 in an area where the user is always closely watching during the game.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10B of the second embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sound ramp control device 262 determines the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 detected by the rotation detection sensor 433 and the discharge count switch 434. Is displayed on the first symbol display device 42 as a notification that allows the player to recognize the count-up notification that increases the number of emissions displayed by one in the number-of-discharges display area 438c of the first symbol display device 42. (For example, it corresponds to the gaming machine described in A8 described above). Thereby, the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 can be confirmed in the display area of the first symbol display device 42, which is always closely watched during the game. It becomes easier to confirm the number of game balls to be played during the game.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10C according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine 10C according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10C according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal process executed by the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a game ball launch / discharge switching process.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the discharge notification for allowing the player to recognize the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 is performed by the second symbol display device 41. The discharge notification which makes the player intuitively recognize the number of the game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 is performed without performing the discharge notification requiring any additional configuration.

  In the present embodiment, for example, by synchronizing the timing at which a player fires a game ball with the timing at which a game ball is discharged from the second discharge unit 421, the number of game balls fired can be visually recognized by the player. Recognition. In this embodiment, the game ball firing handle 18 is vibrated in synchronization with the timing at which the game balls are discharged from the second discharge unit 421. Thus, the player can intuitively count the number of game balls ejected from the second ejection unit 421 by visually counting the number of game balls fired or by counting the number of vibrations tactilely. Make people aware.

  The game ball firing handle 18 will be described in more detail. The game ball launch handle 18 includes a handle portion 18a whose surface is metal-plated and is rotated by an operation of the player, and a touch sensor 18b electrically connected to the metal-plated portion. ing. The game ball firing handle 18 is operated to switch between a firing stop switch 18c operated to stop the firing of the game ball during the firing operation and whether or not the game ball is discharged from the second discharge unit 421. A discharge changeover switch 435e is provided. Further, a vibrator 18d that vibrates the hand of a player operating the game ball firing handle 18 is provided inside the game ball firing handle 18.

  Next, the electrical configuration will be described. The input / output port 555 of the sound lamp control device 262 includes a touch sensor 18c of the game ball launch handle 18, a discharge changeover switch 435e, an input / output port 515 of the payout control device 311 and a discharge forming the second discharge unit 421. The motor 432 is connected.

  When the player touches the handle portion 18a to operate the game ball firing handle 18, a touch signal is output from the touch sensor 18b to the input / output port 555 of the audio lamp control device 262. When the player operates the firing stop switch 18c, a firing stop signal is output to the input / output port 555. The CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 outputs these touch signals and the firing stop signal to the input / output port 515 of the payout control device 311. When the touch signal is input, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 outputs a firing motor driving signal for driving the firing motor 229 to the firing control device 312 unless a firing stop signal is input. As a result, the game balls are shot toward the game board 30 by the game ball launching device 38.

  That is, the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 can control the drive of the firing motor 229 and the drive of the discharge motor 432 based on the touch signal.

  A control flow performed by the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 will be described. As described above, the CPU 551 performs the normal processing as described in the second embodiment and FIG. In addition to these, the CPU 551 executes a game ball launch / discharge switching process as step S1427A to drive the discharge motor 432 in synchronization with the timing of driving the launch motor 229.

  The game ball launch / discharge switching process will be described. In step S1451, the CPU 551 determines whether a touch signal output from the touch sensor 18b has been input. If there is a touch signal input by the player touching the handle portion 18a to operate the game ball firing handle 18, the process proceeds to step S1452, and if there is no touch signal input, the process proceeds to step S1456 described below. .

  In step S1452, the CPU 551 determines whether the press of the discharge switch 435e is detected. The player presses the discharge switch 435e and then touches the handle portion 18a, or presses the discharge switch 435e while the player is in contact with the handle portion 18a. If a press is detected, the flow advances to step S1454 described later. If the press of the discharge switch 435e has not been detected, the process advances to step S1453. In step S1453, the CPU 551 outputs a touch signal to the payout control device 311. After step S1453, the CPU 551 returns to the normal processing.

  In step S1454, the CPU 551 outputs a touch signal to the payout control device 311 and proceeds to step S1454. In step S1454, the CPU 551 outputs a signal for starting discharge of the game ball from the second discharge unit 421. Specifically, in step S1454, CPU 551 outputs a signal for opening second opening / closing member 424 to solenoid 425, and outputs a signal for driving discharge motor 432. That is, in steps S1454 and S1455, the CPU 551 launches the game ball from the game ball launching device 38 and performs the second discharge by contacting the hand with the handle 450 while the discharge changeover switch 435e is pressed. The function of simultaneously starting the discharge of the game balls from the unit 421 is realized. After step S1455, the CPU 551 returns to the normal processing.

  In step S1456, when it is determined in step S1451 that a touch signal has not been input, it is determined whether the discharge motor 432 is driven. If the discharge motor 432 is not being driven, the process ends. If the discharge motor 432 is being driven, the process advances to step S1457 to stop driving the discharge motor 432. In other words, in step S1456 and step S1457, the CPU 551 releases the game ball from the game ball firing device 38 and discharges the game ball from the second discharge unit 421 by releasing the hand from the handle portion 450. The function to stop simultaneously is realized.

  As described above, the CPU 551 sets the discharge motor in accordance with the timing of driving the firing motor 229 when the discharge changeover switch 435e is switched to the side for discharging the game ball from the second discharge unit 421 and the handle portion 18a is gripped. 432 can be driven. In other words, the CPU 551 can perform control such that the second discharge unit 421 discharges one game ball each time the game ball firing device 38 fires one game ball. This allows the player to intuitively recognize the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 by counting the number of game balls fired.

  Further, a vibrator d may be provided inside the game ball firing handle 18. By vibrating the vibrator d provided inside the game ball firing handle 18 in synchronization with the timing at which the game balls are discharged from the second discharge unit 421, the player can determine the number of game balls to be fired. Can be counted tactilely by the number of vibrations of the game ball firing handle 18. Even in this case, the player can intuitively recognize the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421.

  Note that the handle portion 18a, the touch sensor 18b, the vibrator d, the discharge changeover switch 435e, and the sound lamp control device 262 used for the above-described control correspond to an intuitive discharge control means of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10C of the third embodiment, the game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 without using the discharge detection means for detecting the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421. Is controlled by the handle 18a, the touch sensor 18b, the discharge switch 435e, and the audio lamp control device 262 so that the player can intuitively recognize the number of game balls. This corresponds to the gaming machine described in (A9) above). Thereby, the additional configuration for notifying the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 by detecting the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 is not required, The player can intuitively recognize the number of game balls ejected from the second ejection unit 421 while allowing the player to play a game.

  In addition, in synchronization with the firing of the game ball from the game ball firing device 38, the control of the discharge of the game ball from the second discharge unit 421 is performed by the handle portion 18a, the touch sensor 18b, the discharge changeover switch 435e, and the sound lamp control device 262. (For example, the gaming machine described in (A10) described above). Thereby, the player can intuitively recognize the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 by counting the game balls fired from the game ball firing device 38.

  In addition, in synchronization with the launch of the game ball from the game ball launching device 38, the control of the game ball launch handle 18 operated by the player to launch the game ball is controlled by the handle portion 18a, the touch sensor 18b, and the vibrator 18d. And the discharge changeover switch 435e and the sound lamp control device 262 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (A11) above). The player can intuitively recognize the number of game balls discharged from the second discharge unit 421 by counting the number of vibrations of the game ball firing handle operated for firing game balls.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10D according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine 10D according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 57 is a diagram of the lower plate 15 of the fourth embodiment, (a) is a diagram with the front panel 437A attached, and (b) is a diagram with the front panel 437A removed. FIGS. 58A and 58B are diagrams showing the internal configuration of the lower plate 15, in which FIG. 58A is an AA sectional view at the same position as FIG. 5A, FIG. ) Indicates the discharge state. FIGS. 58B and 58C are enlarged views of the left half of the lower plate 15 shown in FIG. 58A. FIG. 59 is a diagram for notifying the state of accommodation of game balls in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B, and FIGS. 59A to 59E are diagrams illustrating the notification on the first symbol display device 42 over time. .

  The second discharging unit 421 of the first embodiment includes a second opening / closing mechanism 423 having a second opening / closing member 424 and a solenoid 425, a second discharging rail 429 having a discharging cam 430, a discharging motor 432, and a rotation detection sensor 433. However, the fourth embodiment employs a second discharge unit 421A having a different configuration. Further, in the first embodiment, the set number is displayed on the discharge indicator 436, but in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the set number is displayed on the first symbol display device 42. Hereinafter, the second discharge unit 421A will be described, and a configuration different from the pachinko machine 10A of the other first embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57 (a), the second discharge unit 421A is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine. Specifically, a part of a region of the outer wall of the lower plate 15 where the second discharge unit 421A is located is formed of a transparent acrylic resin or the like. On the back side of the front wall panel 437A, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), a discharge ball accommodation space 437B, which is an internal space capable of accommodating game balls, is formed. As will be described later, the discharge ball storage space 437B stores a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls stored in the ball storage layer 401 of the lower plate 15 and other game balls among the game balls stored in the ball storage layer 401. They are stored separately from the sphere.

  With such a configuration, after a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B, it is possible to keep the stored state as it is. For example, the game ball can be easily taken out from the discharge ball accommodation space 437B at an arbitrary timing. Also, when the player finishes the game and intends to take a seat with the game balls remaining inside the discharge ball accommodation space 437B, the game balls remain in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B through the front wall panel 437A. Makes it easier for the player to notice that In the present embodiment, only a part of the front surface panel of the second discharge unit 421A is constituted by the front wall panel 437A having transparency, but the side surface and the upper surface of the second discharge unit 421A also have transparency. You may comprise with the front wall panel 437A.

  As shown in FIGS. 58A to 58C, the second discharge unit 421A includes a second opening / closing mechanism 423A having a configuration different from that of the second opening / closing mechanism 423 of the first embodiment. In other words, the second opening / closing mechanism 423A includes a thin plate-shaped second opening / closing member 424A disposed below the second discharge port 422a, a closed position at which the second opening / closing member 424A closes the second discharge port 422a, and a second discharge position. A solenoid 425A for moving the outlet 42a to a closed position where the outlet 42a is opened, a flat plate-shaped second opening / closing member 424B having an opening disposed above the second outlet 422b, and a second outlet 424B for the second opening / closing member 424B. And a coil spring for urging the second opening / closing member 424B in a direction to close the 422b (to the right in this embodiment).

  The diameter of the second outlet 422b is larger than the diameter of the second outlet 422a. With this configuration, many game balls can be discharged from the internal space of the second discharge unit 421A in a short time. When the diameter of the second outlet 422b is configured to be substantially the same as the diameter of the second outlet 422a, it becomes easy to dispose a detection sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the second outlet 422b. When discharging game balls from the internal space of the second discharge unit 421A, the number of game balls actually passing through the second discharge port 422b can be grasped.

  The second opening / closing member 424B is partially fixed to a ball release lever 17A that is exposed from the outer wall of the lower plate 15. The second opening / closing member 424B is configured such that when the ball release lever 17A is slid to the left, the opening and the second discharge port 422b coincide.

  The second discharge unit 421A has the above-described discharge ball housing space 437B as an internal space for temporarily storing game balls entering the second discharge port 422a instead of including the second discharge rail 429 of the first embodiment. It has. The discharge ball storage space 437B is configured such that the maximum number of game balls that can be stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B is smaller than the maximum number of game balls that can be stored in the ball storage layer 401 of the lower plate 15. . A discharge ball count switch 434 is provided between the second discharge port 422a and the discharge ball storage space 437B. Therefore, a game ball accommodated in the ejection ball accommodation space 437B via the second ejection port 422a is detected by the ejection ball count switch 434.

  When the start button 435c is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 58B, the solenoid 425A is excited, the plunger moves in a direction to open the second discharge port 422a, and the second opening / closing member 423A is moved to the open position. Moving. At this time, since the second discharge port 422b is kept closed, the game ball falling downward from the second discharge port 422a is stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B. When the discharge ball count switch 434 detects the passage of the number of game balls set by the setting buttons 435a and 435b, the solenoid 425A is demagnetized, and the plunger returns to the original position, that is, the direction to close the second discharge port 422a. , The second opening / closing member 424A moves to the closed position. Thus, after the player operates the discharge operation unit 435 to set the number of game balls to be discharged, the set number of game balls is automatically stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B.

  Thereafter, when the player slides the ball release lever 17A to the left, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the second discharge port 422b is opened, and the game ball stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B is released. It falls outside the lower plate 15. Before operating the ball-pull lever 17A, the player arranges a container prepared for exchange with food below the second discharge port 422b, so that it is necessary for exchange with food and drink. (The number corresponds to the number corresponding to the number of operations performed by the player) can be easily taken out to the outside.

  Since the diameter of the second discharge port 422b is larger than the diameter of the second discharge port 422a, when the ball release lever 17A is slid, the game balls accommodated in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B frequently fall in a short operation time. Can be done. As a result, the time during which the game is interrupted for the operation of the ball release lever 17A can be further shortened.

  After the set number of game balls are stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B, the ball discharge lever 17 is operated to discharge the game balls stored in the ball storage layer 401 by the first discharge unit 411. Even if the game balls stored in the ball storage layer 401 are used for the game, the number of the game balls stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B remains unchanged. In other words, after the game balls are stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B, even if the game is continued, the number of game balls stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B does not decrease. Therefore, after the game ball is stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B, the player can easily take out the game ball from the discharge ball storage space 437B when the hand becomes empty.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a description will be given of a configuration for notifying the storage state of game balls in the discharge ball storage space 437B. FIG. 59 is a diagram for notifying the state of accommodation of game balls in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B, and FIGS. 59A to 59E are diagrams illustrating the notification on the first symbol display device 42 over time. .

  The state of accommodation of the game balls in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B is notified to the player by information displayed on the first symbol display device 42. In the first symbol display device 42, when displaying the storage state of game balls in the discharge ball storage space 437B, storage state information for notifying the storage state of game balls in the discharge ball storage space 437B is displayed. A situation display area 439a, a set number display area 439b in which set number information notifying the number of set game balls is displayed, and a stored number indicating stored number information notifying the number of stored game balls. A display area 439c is provided.

  When the player operates the setting buttons 435a and 435b to set the number of game balls to be ejected (for example, 40), as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the first symbol display device 42 displays an accommodation status display area. A character indicating that the setting is being performed (“accommodating number is being set”) is displayed at 439a, and the set number (“40”) is displayed at the set number display area 439b. When the player operates the start button 435c, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the second opening / closing member 423A is moved to the open position, and the game ball can be stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B. On the first symbol display device 42, a character (“accommodating”) indicating that a game ball can be accommodated in the discharge ball accommodating space 437B is displayed in the accommodation status display area 439a, and “40” is displayed in the set number display area 439b. Is displayed, and the accommodation number “1” is displayed in the accommodation number display area 439c at the time when the discharge game switch 434 detects the passage of the first game ball.

  When the set number of game balls are stored, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), a character indicating that the storage operation has been completed (“storage completed”) is displayed in the storage status display area 439a, and the set number is set. A number “40” is displayed in each of the display area 439b and the number-of-accommodated display area 439c. These pieces of information are displayed on the screen of the first symbol display device 42 until the ball removal lever 17A is slid by the player. Until the ball release lever 17A is operated, only the storage status display area 439a may be displayed, or only the set number display area 439b and the stored number display area 439c may be displayed. Thus, after the game balls are completely stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B, the game can be played as it is. Also, even during the game, since the information indicating that the storage of the game ball in the discharge ball storage space 437B is completed is displayed at a position easily visible to the player, the discharge ball storage space 437B is displayed. It is possible to reduce forgetting of the existence of the game ball accommodated in the game. When the player slides the ball release lever 17A, the accommodation status display area 439a, the set number display area 439b, and the accommodation number display area 439c are displayed on the screen of the first symbol display device 42, as shown in FIG. Disappear.

  When game balls remain in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), information indicating that game balls remain in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B is displayed in the accommodation status display area 439a (“ball”). Is left. ") Is displayed. Whether or not game balls remain in the discharge ball housing space 437B can be detected by arranging a sensor capable of converting pressure into electricity, such as a piezoelectric sensor, on the bottom surface of the discharge ball housing space 437B. When it is detected that a game ball remains in the discharge ball storage space 437B after a predetermined time has elapsed from the completion of the storage or after a predetermined time has elapsed after the slide operation of the ball release lever 17A, It is good to display like this. Thereby, forgetting to take a game ball accommodated in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B is reduced.

  Note that the above-described first discharge unit 411 corresponds to a first discharge unit of the present invention, and the second discharge unit 421A corresponds to a second discharge unit of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 </ b> D of the fourth embodiment, the lower plate 15 is configured to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 to the outside, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 15. And a second discharge unit 421A that discharges a smaller number of game balls to the outside than the number of game balls discharged by the first discharge unit 411 (for example, the second discharge unit 421A corresponds to the game machine described in A1 described above). Do). According to such a configuration, as in the first embodiment, the lower plate 15 is provided with two types of discharge units, the first discharge unit 411 and the second discharge unit 421A, and uses the second discharge unit 421A. In this case, the number of game balls discharged from the lower plate 15 is smaller than when the first discharge unit 411 is used. Therefore, when a predetermined number of game balls are taken out of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15, if the second discharge unit 421A having a smaller discharge number than the first discharge unit 411 is used, a predetermined number of game balls can be obtained. The operation of taking out the ball becomes easier than using the first discharge unit 411.

  The lower plate 15 includes a ball storage layer 401 that can store game balls and a discharge ball storage space 437B that can store game balls, and the first discharge unit 411 is stored in the ball storage layer 401. The game balls are discharged to the outside, and the second discharge unit 421A discharges the game balls stored in the discharge ball storage space 437B to the outside (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in A16 described above). Therefore, in a state where the game balls are accommodated in the ejection ball accommodation space 437B, the game balls accommodated in the ball accommodation layer 401 are ejected by the first ejection unit 411, or the game balls accommodated in the ball accommodation layer 401 are removed. Even if it is used for a game, the number of game balls accommodated in the discharge ball accommodation space 437B remains unchanged. As a result, even if the game is continued after the game ball is accommodated in the ejection ball accommodation space 437B, the number of game balls accommodated in the ejection ball accommodation space 437B does not decrease. After the game ball is accommodated in the accommodation space 437B, the game ball can be taken out from the discharge ball accommodation space 437B when the hand becomes empty.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10E according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine 10E of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 61 is a rear perspective view of the inner frame 12 for explaining the guide passage unit 450. FIG. FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the back pack unit 203 for explaining the guide path unit 450. FIG. FIGS. 63A and 63B are diagrams illustrating the operation of the passage switching mechanism 457. FIG. 63A is a diagram illustrating the closing of the auxiliary tray guiding passage 456, and FIG. 63B is a diagram illustrating the opening of the auxiliary tray guiding passage 456.

  The pachinko machines 10A and 10B according to the first and second embodiments have a configuration in which two accommodation units, the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15, are provided as units for accommodating the game balls dispensed by the dispensing device 358. The fifth pachinko machine 10E differs from the first and second embodiments in that an auxiliary plate 451 as a second lower plate is provided in addition to the lower plate 15 as the first lower plate. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the pachinko machines 10A and 10B of the first and second embodiments will be described, and the configuration common to the first and second embodiments will be referred to the description of the first and second embodiments.

  The auxiliary plate 451 is provided at a predetermined distance from the left side wall of the lower plate 15 to the left. The auxiliary plate 451 guides a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls paid out during the jackpot state. As for the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15, of the game balls paid out during the jackpot state, the remaining game balls excluding the above-mentioned predetermined number of game balls paid out to the auxiliary plate 451 are paid out. The upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 serve as main accommodation means for accommodating game balls paid out during the jackpot state, and the auxiliary plate 451 assists in accommodating a predetermined number of game balls among the game balls paid out during the jackpot state. It becomes a suitable accommodation means.

  In the case of a general pachinko machine, the game balls paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the upper plate, and when the paid game balls overflow the upper plate, the game balls are paid out to the lower plate. When trying to take out a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls paid out during the jackpot state, the player separates a predetermined number of game balls from among a large number of game balls guided to the lower plate, and Often removed from the plate. However, since the lower plate often contains game balls in addition to the predetermined number of game balls that the player wants to take out, it is troublesome for the player to take out the predetermined number of game balls from the lower plate. Work. In this regard, in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the auxiliary plate 451. Therefore, when a predetermined number of game balls are to be taken out, they are paid out to the auxiliary plate 451. All you have to do is take out all the game balls. Therefore, the operation of taking out a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls paid out during the jackpot state does not hinder the progress of the game.

  The lower plate 15 is provided in a lower plate device 15A disposed on the front of the pachinko machine main body 10E1. The auxiliary plate 451 is provided on an auxiliary plate device 451A arranged at a position different from the lower plate device 15A on the front surface of the pachinko machine main body 10E1. That is, in the lower plate unit 13, the game ball firing handle 18, the lower plate 15, and the auxiliary plate 451 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction in order from the right. Therefore, during the operation of the game ball firing handle 18, both the operation of discharging the game balls from the lower plate 15 and the operation of removing the game balls from the auxiliary plate 451 are facilitated.

  The outer peripheral edge of the auxiliary plate 451 is provided with a guidance operation unit 453 that is pressed by a player when a game ball is stored in the auxiliary plate 451. When the guidance operation unit 453 does not receive the operation of the player, the game balls paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the lower plate 15. When the guidance operation unit 453 receives the operation of the player, a predetermined number of the game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the auxiliary plate 451 and the game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state. Of the remaining game balls are guided to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by providing the guidance operation unit 453, a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the auxiliary plate 451 at a timing desired by the player. Thereby, when the player wants to store the game balls paid out during the jackpot state in the lower plate 15 or the storage container (dollar box), the player must operate the guidance operation unit 453 or the lower plate. 15 can continue to receive the payout of the game balls. On the other hand, when the player wants to exchange the game balls paid out during the jackpot state with food and drink provided by the game hall and eat and drink, the player simply operates the guidance operation unit 453 to play the game on the auxiliary plate 451. The ball can be paid out.

  The guidance operation unit 453 includes a setting button 453a for receiving an input operation for increasing the number of game balls to be guided to the auxiliary plate 451, a setting button 453b for receiving an input operation for decreasing the number of game balls to be guided and set, The start button 453c receives an input operation for starting guidance to the plate 451, and the stop button 453d receives an input operation for stopping guidance to the auxiliary plate 451 and returning to guidance to the lower plate 15. ing. By providing the guidance operation unit 453 at a predetermined distance to the left from the left side wall of the lower plate 15, the player is free even while operating the game ball firing handle 18 with his right hand. The guide operation unit 453 can be easily operated at a position close to the left hand.

  The guidance operation unit 453 is configured to be able to change the number of game balls guided to the auxiliary plate 451 in accordance with the operation of the player. Specifically, each time the player presses the operation button 453a, the number of game balls guided to the auxiliary plate 451 is increased, for example, by 10 balls. Further, each time the player presses the operation button 453b, the number guided to the auxiliary plate 451 is reduced by, for example, 10 balls.

  The number of game balls set by the setting buttons 453a and 453b is configured to be displayed on the first symbol display device 42, similarly to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Note that a display for setting the number of leads may be provided as in the first embodiment.

  The guidance operation unit 453 includes, for example, 50 balls when the player presses once, in addition to the one that increases / decreases the number of game balls guided to the auxiliary plate 451 in response to the press of the player, such as the setting buttons 453a and 453b. , 80, or 100 balls, a memory switch that can guide a predetermined number of game balls to the auxiliary plate 451 may be used. In this way, the guidance operation required by the player is simplified.

  Next, a configuration for switching the guide destination of the game ball will be described.

  The game ball distribution unit 245 of this embodiment includes an opening 245 a communicating with the auxiliary plate 451 in addition to the opening 245 a communicating with the upper plate 19 and the opening 245 b communicating with the lower plate 15. The opening 245a communicates with the upper plate guiding passage 454, the opening 245b communicates with the lower plate guiding passage 455, and the opening 245c communicates with the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456. Thereby, the game ball guided to the upper plate guiding passage 454 or the lower plate guiding passage 455 is stored in the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15, and the game ball guided to the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456 is stored in the auxiliary plate 451. Will be accommodated.

  The switching of the guide destination of the game ball paid out during the jackpot state is performed by the guide path unit 450. Specifically, the guiding passage unit 450 includes an upper plate guiding passage 454 that guides game balls paid out from the payout device 358 in a direction in which the upper plate 19 is located, and a lower plate 15 that feeds game balls paid out from the payout device 358. A lower plate guiding path 455 for guiding the player ball in the direction in which it is located, an auxiliary plate guiding path 456 for guiding the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 in the direction in which the auxiliary plate 451 is located, and a guide destination of the game balls paid out from the payout device 358. And a path switching mechanism 457 for switching between the upper plate guiding passage 454 or the lower plate guiding passage 455 and the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456. The direction in which the auxiliary plate 451 is located corresponds to a predetermined direction of the present invention, and the direction in which the upper plate 19 is located and the direction in which the lower plate 15 is located correspond to directions different from the predetermined direction of the present invention.

  The auxiliary dish guiding path 456 includes an auxiliary dish guiding number count switch 460A that detects a game ball passing through the auxiliary dish guiding path 456.

  The lower dish guide path 455 includes a lower dish full sensor 460B that detects a game ball overflowing in the lower dish guide path 455 after the lower bowl 15 is filled with game balls. When the lower plate full sensor 460B detects a game ball overflowing the lower plate guiding passage 455, the payout of the game ball from the payout device 358 is temporarily stopped. When the player operates the ball release lever 17 or the like to discharge the game balls from the lower plate 15, the lower plate full sensor 460B stops detecting the game balls overflowing in the lower plate guide passage 455, and the payout device 358. Payout of game balls from is resumed. The lower plate full sensor 460B detects the fullness of the lower plate guiding passage 455 by, for example, using a light sensor including a pair of a light emitter and a light receiver to detect a game ball between the light emitter and the light receiver. I have.

  The passage switching mechanism 457 is a passage switching member that is switched between a first position 462 located on the side of the auxiliary dish guide passage 456 and a second position 463 whose tip side is located on the side of the upper dish guide passage 454 or the lower dish guide passage 455. 458, and a switching drive unit 459 that drives the passage switching member 458 to switch between the first position 462 and the second position 463. The passage switching member 458 is formed of, for example, a movable plate whose front end rotates in the forward and reverse directions while its base end is pivotally supported in the discharge passage 359. The switching drive unit 459 has a rotary shaft connected to the base end side of the movable plate, and includes a rotary solenoid disposed outside the discharge passage 359. The movable plate rotates between a first position 462 where the tip side is located on the auxiliary dish guide path 456 side, and a second position 463 where the tip side is located on the upper dish guide path 454 or the lower dish guide path 455 side.

  When the guidance operation unit 453 is not operated by the player, the path switching member 458 is arranged at the first position 462 in both the normal game state and the big hit state. When the passage switching member 458 is disposed at the first position 462, the upper plate guiding passage 454 and the lower plate guiding passage 455 are opened, and the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456 is closed. The game balls paid out during the jackpot state flow down in the normal flow path of being guided to the upper plate guiding passage 454, and being guided to the lower plate guiding passage 455 when the upper plate guiding passage 454 becomes full of game balls. .

  When the guidance operation unit 453 is operated by the player, the passage switching member 458 is rotated from the first position 462 to the left in FIG. 47 and is switched to the second position 463. When the passage switching member 458 is switched to the second position 463, the upper plate guiding passage 454 is closed and the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456 is opened. Therefore, the game balls paid out during the jackpot state flow down in a special flow path that is guided to the auxiliary dish guide path 456 without being guided to the upper dish guide path 454 and the lower dish guide path 455.

  When the guide from the dispensing device 358 to the auxiliary plate 451 is completed, the passage switching member 458 is rotated rightward in FIG. 47 from the second position 463 and switched to the first position 462. When the passage switching member 458 is switched to the first position 462, the upper plate guiding passage 454 is opened again and the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456 is closed. Therefore, the game balls paid out during the jackpot state flow down in the normal flow path of being guided to the upper tray guide path 454 and the lower tray guide path 455 without being guided to the auxiliary tray guide path 456.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the present pachinko machine 10E will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10E according to the fifth embodiment.

  The sound lamp control device 262 has a function of controlling the switching of the guidance passage by the passage switching mechanism 457. The input / output port 537 of the audio lamp control device 262 includes a guidance operation unit 453, a passage switching member 458, a switching drive unit 459, an auxiliary plate guidance number counting switch 460A, and a lower plate full sensor 460B used for switching control of the guidance passage. Is connected. The payout control process and the guidance passage process described below are stored in the ROM 5534 as programs executed by the CPU 551.

  Next, the control related to the switching of the guide path performed by the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing by the audio lamp control device 262. FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating the guidance number setting process. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the guidance passage process. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the guidance stop interruption processing.

  The main processing and the normal processing performed by the audio ramp control device 262 according to the present embodiment are the same as the processing performed by the audio ramp control device 262 according to the second embodiment, except for the contents of the timer interrupt processing and the stop interrupt processing. Hereinafter, differences from the processing performed by the audio lamp control device 262 of the second embodiment will be described.

  In FIG. 65, the CPU 551 in the audio lamp control device 262 executes a timer interrupt process, for example, every 2 msec.

  In step S1601, the CPU 551 determines whether pressing of the setting buttons 453a and 453b has been detected. If it is determined that the pressing of the setting buttons 435a and 453b has been detected, the process advances to step S1602. In step S1602, the CPU 551 performs a guidance number setting process described later. If the pressing of the setting buttons 435a and 435b is not detected, the process advances to step S1603.

  In step S1603, the CPU 551 determines whether pressing of the start button 453c has been detected. If it is determined that the start button 453c has been pressed, the process advances to step S1604. In step S1604, the CPU 551 performs a guidance passage process described later. If the press of the start button 453c is not detected, the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 66, the guidance number setting process performed by the CPU 551 will be described.

  In step S1611, the CPU 551 determines whether the guidance flag is “1”. The CPU sets the guidance flag to 1 when the switching drive unit 459 is driven in the direction for switching the passage switching member 458 to the second position 463 in the guidance passage process described below. Further, the CPU 551 sets the guidance flag to 0 when the switching drive unit 459 is driven in the direction for switching the passage switching member 458 to the first position 462 in the guidance passage process described later. When it is determined that the guidance flag is 1, the present process is terminated. If it is determined that the guidance flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S1612.

  In step S1612, the CPU 551 determines whether pressing of the setting button 453a (referred to as the + button 453a in this process) is detected. In the present embodiment, for example, each time the + button 453a is pressed once, a guidance setting number of +10 balls is input as described later. If the press of the + button 453a is detected, the process advances to step S1613. If the press of the + button 453a is not detected, the process proceeds to step S1616 described below.

  In step S1613, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the set number input by pressing the + button 453a exceeds the upper limit. The upper limit of the set number is, for example, 100 balls. If it is determined that the set number does not exceed the upper limit, the set number is incremented by +10 in step S1614, and the process proceeds to step S1615. If it is determined that the set number exceeds the upper limit, the process skips step S1614 and proceeds to step S1615. In step S1615, the CPU 551 displays the current set number on the first symbol display device.

  If it is determined in step S1612 that the pressing of the + button 453a has not been detected, it is determined in step S1616 whether the pressing of the setting button 453b (referred to as the-button 453b in this process) has been detected. In this embodiment, as will be described later, each time the-button 453b is pressed once, the set number of discharges of -10 balls is input corresponding to the + button 453a. If the press of the-button 453b is detected, the process advances to step S1617. If the press of the-button 453b is not detected, the process ends.

  In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the set number input in a minus direction by pressing the-button 453b is lower than a lower limit value, that is, 0. If it is determined that the set number is not less than the lower limit, the set number of discharges is set to -10, and the process proceeds to step S1618. If it is determined that the set number is lower than the lower limit, the process skips step S1618 and proceeds to step S1615, where the current set number is displayed on the first symbol display device.

  With reference to FIG. 67, the guide path process performed by the CPU 551 will be described.

  In step S1621, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the big hit flag is 1. The CPU 551 sets the big hit flag to 1 when the big hit start command is received, and sets the big hit flag to 0 when the big hit state is ended. If the big hit flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S1622, and if the big hit flag is 0, this process ends.

  In step S1622, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the number of guidance has been set by the guidance operation unit 453. If the number of guides has been set, the process proceeds to step S1623. If the number of guides has not been set, the process ends.

  In step S1623, the CPU 551 gives an instruction to drive the switching drive unit 459 so that the passage switching member 458 switches from the first position 462 to the second position 463. That is, the switching drive unit 459 rotates the passage switching member 458 from the first position 462 to the second position 463 to open the auxiliary dish guiding passage 456. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are guided to the auxiliary dish guide path 456. At this time, the CPU 551 sets the guidance flag to 1.

  The CPU 551 stores the set number input from the guidance operation unit 453 in the storage area e of the RAM 553 (step S1624), and stores the guidance number derived from the count value of the auxiliary dish guidance number count switch 460A in the storage area f of the RAM 553. (Step S1625).

  In step S1626, the CPU 551 performs the calculation of ef using the values of the storage areas e and f described above, and determines whether or not the calculation result is 0. That is, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the number obtained by subtracting the number of leads from the set number is 0. If it is 0, it indicates that the set number of game balls have been guided, and the process proceeds to step S1627. If it is not 0, since the guiding of the set number of gaming balls has not been completed, the process returns to step S1625, and the processing of steps S1625 and S1626 is repeated until the guiding number matches the set number.

  Here, similarly to the second embodiment, the CPU 551 increases the number of guidance stored in the RAM 553 by one each time a game ball passing through the auxiliary tray guidance passage 456 is detected from the auxiliary tray guidance number count switch 460A. The second symbol display device 41 informs the second symbol display device 41 of the number of game balls passing through the auxiliary dish guiding passage 456. That is, when the guidance of the game ball to the auxiliary dish guidance passage 456 is started, the count-up notification in which the number of guidance displayed on the second symbol display device 41 is increased by one is performed.

  In step S1627, the CPU 551 gives an instruction to drive the switching driver 459 so that the passage switching member 458 switches from the second position 463 to the first position 462. That is, the switching drive unit 459 rotates the passage switching member 458 from the second position 463 to the first position 462, and closes the auxiliary dish guiding passage 456. Thereby, the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is guided to the upper plate guiding passage 454 or the lower plate guiding passage 455. At this time, the CPU 551 sets the guidance flag to 0. This ends the process.

  With reference to FIG. 68, the guidance stop interruption processing performed by the CPU 551 will be described.

  The guidance stop interruption process is a process that occurs when the player presses the stop button 453d to stop the guidance operation. When the player presses the stop button 453d, an interrupt signal for performing this processing is output to the CPU 551.

  In step S1631, the CPU 551 determines whether pressing of the stop button 453d is detected. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-described interrupt signal has been received. If the press of the stop button 453d is detected, the process proceeds to step S1632. If the pressing of the stop button 453d is not detected, the process ends.

  In step S1632, the CPU 551 determines whether the guidance flag is “1”. If it is determined that the guidance flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S1633, and if it is determined that the guidance flag is not 1, the present process ends. In step S1633, the CPU 551 detects whether 10 game balls have been guided from the time point when the stop button 453d is pressed, and repeats this process until 10 game balls are detected. This is because, in the present embodiment, the guidance of the game ball is set in units of ten balls, and the game ball is guided in units of ten balls. If it is detected that ten game balls have been guided from the point in time when the pressing of the stop button 453d is detected, the flow proceeds to step S1634. In step S1634, the guidance flag is set to 0, and the passage switching member 458 is switched from the second position 463 to the first position 462. Thus, the present process ends. When the guidance flag becomes 0, the above-described guidance number setting process becomes possible.

  The upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 described above correspond to a first extracting unit or a first storing unit of the present invention, and the auxiliary plate 451 corresponds to a second extracting unit or a second storing unit of the present invention. The guidance passage unit 450 corresponds to the guidance means of the present invention. In addition, the pachinko machine main body 10E1 corresponds to the game machine main body of the present invention, the lower plate device 15A corresponds to the first storage device of the present invention, and the auxiliary plate device 451A corresponds to the second storage device of the present invention. I do. The guidance operation unit 453 corresponds to the guidance operation means of the present invention. Further, the upper plate guiding passage 454 or the lower plate guiding passage 455 corresponds to a first guiding passage of the present invention, the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456 corresponds to a second guiding passage of the present invention, and the passage switching mechanism 457 includes: It corresponds to the switching unit of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10E of the fifth embodiment, the payout device 358 that pays out game balls having a predetermined value, and the upper plate 19 and the first lower plate that accommodate the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 are provided. The lower plate 15, an auxiliary plate 451 as a second lower plate for accommodating game balls to be paid out by the payout device 358, and assisting some of the game balls to be paid out during the special jackpot state, for example, during a jackpot state A guide path unit 450 that guides the player 451 to the plate 451 and guides the remaining game balls out of the game balls paid out during the jackpot state to either the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 is provided (for example, the game described in B1 described above). Machine). According to such a configuration, most of the game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state are guided to either the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15, but the game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state. Some of the game balls are guided to the auxiliary plate 451. Therefore, when it is desired to take out some game balls from the game balls paid out during the jackpot state, it is not necessary to take out some game balls separately from a large number of game balls paid out, and the auxiliary plate 451 is not necessary. It is only necessary to take out all the game balls to be paid out, so that it is easy to take out some of the game balls from the game balls paid out during the jackpot state. As a result, during the game, since the work of taking out a part of the game ball from the accommodation means accommodating the game ball does not easily hinder the progress of the game, the player can play the game ball provided by the game hall during the game. If you want to exchange food and drink, you can exchange the food and drink provided by the game hall with the game ball without patience.

In addition, the guidance passage unit 450 guides a predetermined number of game balls out of the game balls paid out during the big hit state as a special game state in a predetermined direction, and sets the remaining game balls out of the game balls paid out during the big hit state, for example. The guidance is performed in a direction different from the predetermined direction. The upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 (first lower plate) accommodate remaining game balls guided in different directions by the guide passage unit 450. The auxiliary plate 451 (second lower plate) accommodates game balls guided in a predetermined direction by the guide passage unit 450. According to such a configuration, the remaining game balls excluding a predetermined number of the game balls out of the game balls paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 The predetermined number of the game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the auxiliary plate 451 and stored in the auxiliary plate 451. Therefore, when it is desired to take out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls paid out during the jackpot state, a predetermined number of game balls are separately taken out from the game medium stored in the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15. It is not necessary to take out a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out to the auxiliary plate 451. As described above, a predetermined number of game balls can be taken out by taking out the game balls from the auxiliary plate 451, so that a predetermined number of game balls can be easily taken out from the game balls paid out to the accommodation means by the payout means. .
Further, after the predetermined number of game balls are guided to the auxiliary plate 451 by the guidance passage unit 450, the predetermined number of game balls are accommodated in the auxiliary plate 451, so that the predetermined number of game balls can be taken out in a short time. Can be. Therefore, the operation of taking out a predetermined number of game balls does not easily hinder the progress of the game.

  Further, a pachinko machine main body 10E1 having various game means including a payout device 358 is provided, the lower plate 15 is provided on a lower plate device 15A arranged on the front surface of the pachinko machine main body 10E1, and the auxiliary plate 451 is provided with a pachinko machine. The auxiliary dish device 451A is provided at a position different from the lower dish device 15A on the front surface of the machine body 10E1 (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in B2 described above). According to such a configuration, the lower plate device 15A including the lower plate 15 and the auxiliary plate device 451A including the auxiliary plate 451 are disposed at different positions. It is easy to perform both the work of taking out the game ball from the game and the work of taking out the game ball from the auxiliary plate 451.

  The payout device 358 includes a guidance operation unit 453 that receives an operation of the player for paying out the game ball to the auxiliary plate 451. When the guidance operation unit 453 does not receive the operation of the player, the payout device 358 performs the operation during the big hit state. When the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15, and the guidance operation unit 453 receives the operation of the player, a predetermined number of the game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the auxiliary plate 451, The remaining game balls among the game balls paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in B6 described above). According to such a configuration, when the player wants to store game balls to be paid out during the big hit state, the player can guide the game balls to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15. In addition, when the player wants to exchange game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state with food and drink provided by the game hall and to eat and drink, the player simply operates the guidance operation unit 453 and places the game balls on the auxiliary plate 451. Can be induced. Therefore, the player can guide the game ball to the auxiliary plate 451 at a timing he likes.

  In addition, the guidance operation unit 453 is configured to be able to change the number of a predetermined number of game media guided to the auxiliary plate 451 while the payout device 358 is in the state of the big hit, according to the operation of the player (for example, as described above). Corresponding to the gaming machine described in B8). According to such a configuration, the number of game balls guided to the auxiliary plate 451B can be changed according to the operation of the player. It is possible to cope with a case where a plurality of settings are made in accordance with the type of.

  In addition, the guide path unit 450 assists the upper plate guide path 454 or the lower plate guide path 455 for guiding the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15, and the game balls paid out from the payout device 358. An auxiliary dish guide path 456 for guiding to the plate 451, and a path switching mechanism 457 for switching the guide destination of the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 between the upper dish guide path 454 or the lower dish guide path 455 and the auxiliary dish guide path 456. And. The guide passage unit 450 guides a predetermined number of game balls paid out during the jackpot state to the auxiliary plate 451 when the passage switching mechanism 457 switches the guide destination of the game balls to the auxiliary plate guide passage 456. Then, when the passage switching mechanism 457 switches the guide destination of the game ball to the upper plate guide passage 454 or the lower plate guide passage 455, the remaining game balls among the game balls paid out during the jackpot state are replaced with the upper plate 19 or The user is guided to the lower plate 15 (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in B9 described above). According to such a configuration, the guiding destination of the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 can be switched to any one of the upper plate 19, the lower plate 15, and the auxiliary plate 451.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10F according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 69 is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine 10F of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10F according to the sixth embodiment. 71A and 71B are diagrams illustrating the operation of the passage switching mechanism 457B. FIG. 71A is a diagram illustrating the closing of the auxiliary dish guiding passage 456A, and FIG. 71B is a diagram illustrating the opening of the auxiliary dish guiding passage 456B. FIG. 72 is a flowchart illustrating an example of normal processing executed by the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the lower dish guide path monitoring / guide path processing. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the auxiliary dish guide path monitoring / guide path processing.

  In the fifth embodiment, the passage switching mechanism 457 performs the guidance passage process when the setting button 435a is pressed and the start button 435c is pressed. In the present embodiment, the passage switching mechanism is used. In step 457B, the guidance path process is performed even when the setting button 435a and the start button 435c are not pressed. Specifically, in the fifth embodiment, when the lower plate full sensor 460B detects a game ball overflowing in the lower plate guiding passage 455, the payout device 358 stops paying out the game ball. When the dish full sensor 460B detects a game ball overflowing in the lower dish guide path 455, the guide destination of the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is switched from the upper dish guide path 454 or the lower dish guide path 455 to the auxiliary dish guide path 456A. . The auxiliary dish guide passage 456A guides the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 to the auxiliary dish 451. As described above in the fifth embodiment, the auxiliary dish guide path 456A constitutes a guide path unit 450 together with the upper dish guide path 453, the lower dish guide path 455, and the path switching mechanism 457.

  The auxiliary plate 451 according to the present embodiment is different from the auxiliary plate 451 according to the fifth embodiment in that the guide operation unit 453 is not provided. In the present embodiment, the switching of the auxiliary dish guide passage 456A is performed even when the guide operation unit 453 is not provided.

  First, the passage switching mechanism 457B in this embodiment will be described. The auxiliary dish guide passage 456A in the present embodiment is formed by a bypass passage 456A1 bent substantially in a U-shape or a V-shape, and a straight passage 456A2 extending downward in a straight line communicating with the tip of the bypass passage 456A1. ing. An auxiliary dish full sensor 460C that detects that the auxiliary dish guide path 456A is full of game balls is provided upstream of the communication point between the bypass path 456A1 and the straight path 456A2. The auxiliary dish fullness sensor 460C detects the fullness of the auxiliary dish guiding path 456A by using a light sensor including a pair of light emitters and light receivers, for example, when a game ball enters between the light emitter and the light receiver. I have.

  Next, the electrical configuration will be described. When the lower plate full sensor 460B outputs a signal indicating that the lower plate guide passage 455 is full to the CPU 551 of the audio lamp controller 262, the CPU 551 instructs the switching drive unit 459 to switch the passage switching unit 458. A signal for switching from the first position 462 to the second position 463 shown in FIG. 67 is output. When the auxiliary dish fullness sensor 460C outputs a signal to the CPU 551 indicating that the auxiliary dish guiding path 456A is full, the CPU 551 notifies the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 of the fullness of the auxiliary dish guiding path 456A. Output the signal shown. Upon receiving this signal, the CPU 511 outputs a signal to stop driving the payout motor 358a. Thus, even when the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 are full of game balls, the game can be continued until the auxiliary plate guide path 456 is detected to be full.

  Next, a flow of a normal process performed by the CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 will be described. The normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the present embodiment is basically the same as the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the second embodiment. However, after step S1427, the lower plate guiding path monitoring and guiding path processing (step S1427A), The difference is that the dish guidance passage monitoring and guidance passage processing (step S1427B) is performed.

  The lower plate guiding path monitoring and guiding path processing will be described. In step S1651, the CPU 551 determines whether the path switching member 458 is at the first position 462 or the second position 463. When it is determined that the passage switching member 458 is at the first position 462, the process proceeds to step S1652, and when it is determined that the passage switching member 458 is at the second position 463, the process proceeds to step S1654.

  In step S1652, it is determined whether the lower plate full sensor 460B has detected a full state. If the full state of the lower plate guiding passage 456 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S1653. If the full state of the lower plate guiding passage 456 has not been detected, this process ends. In step S1653, the CPU 551 switches the passage switching member 458 to the second position to open the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456A. Thereafter, the CPU 551 returns to the normal processing.

  As described above, even when the lower plate guide path 455 is full of game balls, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are guided to the auxiliary plate guide path 456A and stored in the auxiliary plate 451. Therefore, even when the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 are full of game balls, the game can be continued for a while.

  If the passage switching member 458 is already at the second position 463 in step S1651, in step S1654, it is determined whether the lower plate full sensor 460B has detected a full state. When the lower plate full sensor 460B does not detect a full state, the ball emptying lever 17 and the like are operated to release the lower plate 15 and the lower plate guiding passage 456 from the full state. In this case, in step S1655, the passage switching member 458 is returned to the first position 462, and the lower plate guiding passage 455 is opened. Thereafter, the CPU 551 returns to the normal processing. If it is determined in step S1654 that the lower plate full sensor 460B has detected the full state, the present process ends to continue opening the auxiliary plate guiding passage 454A.

  In this way, when the full state of the lower dish guide path 455 is eliminated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are paid out to the lower dish guide path 455 again, so that the auxiliary dish guide path 456A is immediately filled. Such situations can be avoided.

  The auxiliary dish guide path monitoring / guide path processing will be described. In step S1661, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the auxiliary tray full sensor 460C has detected a full state. If it is determined that the auxiliary plate full sensor 460C has detected the full state, the process proceeds to step S1662. In step S1662, the CPU 551 gives the payout control device 311 an instruction to stop the payout motor 358a. Thereby, the payout of the game balls by the payout control device 311 is stopped. Thereafter, the CPU 551 returns to the normal processing. If it is not determined in step S1661 that the auxiliary dish fullness sensor 460C has detected the full state, the auxiliary dish guide path 454A still has room to accept a game ball, and thus this process ends.

  Thus, even when the upper plate 19 and the lower plate 15 are full of game balls, the game can be continued until the auxiliary plate guiding passage 454A is full.

  In addition, the fact that the lower plate full sensor 460B detects the full state corresponds to a case where a predetermined guide destination switching condition except for the operation of the player is satisfied. In addition, the fact that the lower plate full sensor 460B stops detecting the full state after the lower plate full sensor 460B detects the full state corresponds to the case where a predetermined guide destination return condition is satisfied.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10F of the sixth embodiment, when the predetermined guide destination switching condition except for the operation of the player is satisfied, the guide path unit 450 controls the game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state. A predetermined number of gaming balls are guided to the auxiliary plate 451 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (B4) above). Therefore, the player can switch the payout destination of the game balls to be paid out during the jackpot state without performing the operation when the predetermined guide destination switching condition other than the operation of the player is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to reduce the labor required for switching the payout destination of the game balls. Note that the predetermined guidance destination switching condition excluding the operation of the player is a condition under which the guidance destination can be automatically switched if the predetermined condition is satisfied without the operation of the player.

  In addition, when the predetermined guide destination return condition is satisfied after the predetermined guide destination switching condition is satisfied, the guide path unit 450 removes the remaining game balls among the game balls paid out during the jackpot state by using the upper plate 19 or the upper plate 19. The user is guided to one of the lower dishes 15 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (B5) described above). Therefore, when the predetermined guide destination return condition is satisfied, the player can return the guide destination of the remaining game balls among the game balls paid out during the jackpot state to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15. Note that the case where the predetermined guide destination return condition is satisfied may be an operation of the player, or may be an operation other than the operation of the player.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10G according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 75 is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine 10G of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 76 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame and the front frame set are opened to explain the measuring unit 470. 77 is a diagram for explaining the weight measurement of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15, (a) is a BB cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 76, and (b) is a CC cross-sectional view shown in FIG. FIG. 2C is a circuit diagram for explaining a strain sensor.

  The pachinko machine 10G according to the seventh embodiment uses a measuring unit 470 that measures the weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 and the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 and accommodated by the lower plate 15, The weight information acquisition unit 479 for acquiring weight information corresponding to the weight of one game ball, and the weight of the game ball stored in the lower plate 15 is reduced based on the weight information acquired by the weight information acquisition unit 479. A point provided with a weight / number conversion unit 480 for converting the number of game balls accommodated in the plate 15 and a lower plate number display unit 481 for displaying the number of game balls converted by the weight / number conversion unit 480. Are different from the pachinko machines 10A to 10F of the first to sixth embodiments.

  According to such a configuration, in obtaining the weight information corresponding to the weight of one game ball, the game ball paid out by the payout device 358 and stored in the lower plate 15 is used, so that the weight of the game ball is obtained. Weight information used for conversion from the number of game balls to the number of game balls is easily obtained. Based on the acquired weight information, the weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 is converted into the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15, so that the number of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 The number is determined exactly. Since the converted number of game balls is displayed on the lower bowl number display section 481, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls. Therefore, even during the game, it is easy to accurately grasp the number of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15.

  Even if the weight of one game ball changes during the period in which the gaming machine is installed, the payout device 358 is actually included in the weight information used to convert the weight of the game ball into the number of game balls. Since the weight of one game ball with respect to the game ball paid out and stored in the lower plate 15 is reflected, the accurate number of game balls can be continuously displayed.

  Next, a configuration for measuring the weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 will be described.

  The lower plate 15 is composed of an outer wall portion 15p formed so as to rise from the outer bottom surface toward the outer side surface, and a lower plate main body 15u that stores a game ball while being stored inside the outer wall portion 15p. . A discharge port 15q for discharging game balls to the outside of the lower plate 15 is formed in the center of the outer wall portion 15p, and a flat inner peripheral edge 15r is formed at an intermediate position on the outer side surface. A discharge port 15v is formed in the lower plate body 15u so as to communicate with the discharge port 15p, and an outer peripheral edge 15w is formed so as to vertically face the inner peripheral edge 15r.

  In the outer wall portion 15p, a concave portion 15s which is depressed downward is formed in a part of the inner peripheral edge 15r, and a columnar strain generating body 475a made of metal is arranged with one end fixed to the edge of the concave portion 15s. Has been established. The lower plate main body 15u is formed with a convex portion 15x projecting downward at a part of the outer peripheral edge 15w, and the other end of the strain body 475a is fixed to the convex portion 15x. A strain sensor 475 having a thin plate-shaped resistor called a strain gauge is provided between the fixed portion on one end side and the fixed portion on the other end side of the strain generating element 475a. Note that the strain sensor 475 is used as a general term for the resistor, a circuit described later, and an equation (program) for obtaining the amount of strain.

  When the game ball is accommodated in the lower plate main body 15u, the flexure element 475a is pressed by the convex portion 15x, and is deformed in the concave portion 15s as shown by a two-dot chain line. The resistor expands and contracts according to the deformation of the flexure element 475a, and the resistance value of the resistor increases and decreases according to the expansion and contraction. The strain sensor 475 measures the change in the resistance value and outputs it as a change in voltage.

  That is, since the change in the resistance value of the resistor is very small, the change in the resistance value is output as a change in the voltage converted by the well-known Wheatstone bridge circuit. In this circuit, the output voltage is Eout, the input voltage is Ein, the original resistance value of the strain sensor 475 is R1, the resistance values of the other resistors are R2, R3, and R4, and R1 = R2 = R3 = R4. is there. In this circuit, it is known that a change dE in the output voltage can be expressed as dE = Ein · K · ε / 4. Note that K is the cage ratio of the strain sensor 475, and ε is the strain amount. The distortion amount ε is obtained from the output voltage change dE obtained by measurement. The amount of distortion detected by the distortion sensor 475 is converted into the total weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15, as described later.

  The distortion sensor 475 is an example of a weight sensor that detects the total weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15. The total weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 can be obtained by a weight sensor such as a piezoelectric element that converts a force applied by the lower plate main body 15u that accommodates the game balls into a voltage.

  Next, since the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are configured to be paid out preferentially to the lower plate 15, a configuration for switching the guide destination of the game balls will be described with reference to FIGS. I do. FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the inner frame 12 for explaining the guide passage unit 450A. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the back pack unit 203 for explaining the guide path unit 450A. FIGS. 80A and 80B are diagrams for explaining the operation of the passage switching mechanism 457. FIG. 80A shows the closing of the second lower plate guiding passage 483, and FIG. 80B shows the opening of the second lower plate guiding passage 483.

  In the present embodiment, instead of the guidance passage unit 450 in the fifth embodiment, a guidance passage unit 450A for guiding a game ball directly to the lower plate 15 is provided. Specifically, instead of the auxiliary dish guiding path 456, a path for guiding game balls directly to the lower dish 15 is provided. Here, the lower dish guiding path 455 in the fifth embodiment is referred to as a first lower dish guiding path 482, and a path for directly guiding a game ball to the lower dish 15 is referred to as a second lower dish guiding path 483. The first lower dish guiding passage 482 communicates with the opening 245a of the game ball distributing section 245, and the second lower dish guiding passage 483 communicates with the opening 245e of the game ball distributing section 245.

  The passage switching mechanism 457A of this embodiment includes a passage switching member 458A and a switching drive 459A. The switching drive unit 459A switches the guide destination of the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 to one of the upper plate guiding passage 454, the first lower plate guiding passage 482, and the second lower plate guiding passage 483. Is configured. Specifically, the switching drive unit 459A includes a first position 462A located on the second lower plate guiding passage 483 side and a second position 463A having a leading end side located on the upper plate guiding passage 454 side. Rotate 458A. The second lower tray guide path 483 is provided with a second lower tray path detection sensor 477 that detects a game ball passing through the second lower tray guide path 483.

  During a period other than a period in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out in a normal gaming state or a jackpot state to be described later, the passage switching member 458A is disposed at the first position 462A, so that the upper plate guiding passage 454 and the first The lower plate guiding passage 482 is opened, and the second lower plate guiding passage 483 is closed. Therefore, the game balls paid out during these periods are guided to the upper plate guiding passage 454, and when the upper plate guiding passage 454 becomes full of game balls, the game balls are guided to the first lower plate guiding passage 482. It flows down in the channel.

  When the big hit state occurs, the passage switching member 458 is switched from the first position 462A to the second position 463A, the upper plate guiding passage 454 is closed, and the auxiliary plate guiding passage 456 is opened. The game balls paid out during the jackpot state flow down in a special flow path of being guided directly to the second lower dish guiding path 483 without being guided to the upper dish guiding path 454 and the first lower dish guiding path 482. I do. Specifically, in a jackpot state that occurs first after the player starts the game, for example, a predetermined number of game balls from the first payout game ball are directly paid out to the lower plate 15.

  When a predetermined number of game balls are paid out from the game balls paid out first during the jackpot state, the passage switching member 458 is switched from the second position 463A to the first position 462A, and again the upper plate guiding passage 454. Is opened, and the second lower plate guiding passage 483 is closed. Therefore, among the game balls paid out during the jackpot state, the game balls paid out after the predetermined number are not guided to the second lower plate guiding passage 483, but the upper plate guiding passage 454 and the first lower plate guiding passage 482. And flow down in a normal flow path.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the present pachinko machine 10G will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 81 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10G according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 82 is a block diagram illustrating a main part of an electrical configuration according to the seventh embodiment.

  This embodiment is different from the above-described first to sixth embodiments in that a configuration is provided in which the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 is calculated based on the weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15. . Hereinafter, only the configuration specific to the seventh embodiment will be described, and the description of the first to sixth embodiments will be referred to for the other configurations common to the first to sixth embodiments.

  In the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 262 has a function of calculating the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 15 based on the weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15. A program for realizing the function is stored in the ROM 552 of the audio lamp control device 262. The program is executed using the CPU 551 and the RAM 553 of the audio lamp control device 262. In this embodiment, the function of the CPU 551 executing the program is referred to as a calculation control unit 471. To the input / output port 555 of the audio lamp control device 262, a distortion sensor 475, a second lower counter passage counter 478, a lower counter ball number display section 481, a path switching member 458, a switching drive section 459, and the like are respectively connected.

  The calculation control unit 471 includes a distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476, a second lower plate passage counter 478, a weight information acquisition unit 479, and a weight / number conversion unit 480, which will be described in detail below. The distortion / weight conversion unit 476, the weight information acquisition unit 479, and the weight / number conversion unit 480 are stored in the ROM 552 as programs executed by the CPU 551.

  The distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 inputs the detected value of the distortion amount output from the distortion sensor 475 and converts it into the total weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 corresponding to the detected value of the distortion amount. Output. Note that the strain sensor 475 and the strain amount / weight conversion unit 476 constitute the measuring unit 470 of the present embodiment.

  The second lower plate passage counter 478 inputs a signal output when a game ball passes through the second lower plate passage detection sensor 477, and counts the number of game balls passing through the second lower plate passage detection sensor 477. Count. When counting the passage of a predetermined number of game balls, the second lower plate passage counter 478 outputs a signal indicating the passage of the predetermined number of game balls. The predetermined number is, for example, 10 balls.

  The weight information acquisition unit 479 acquires, as weight information, the average weight indicating the average weight of one game ball based on the weight obtained by measuring the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 with the measurement unit 470. Specifically, the weight information acquisition unit 479 receives a signal output when a predetermined number of game balls are counted by the second lower plate passage counter 478, and outputs the signal to the lower plate 15 at the time of inputting the signal. Get the total weight of the game balls contained. The weight information acquisition unit 479 acquires the average weight of one game ball by dividing the total weight by a predetermined number. The weight information acquisition unit 479 stores the acquired average weight in the RAM 553.

  In the present embodiment, the weight information acquisition unit 479 is configured to divide the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 and accommodated in the lower plate 15 in a jackpot state in which the game balls are more frequently paid out than in the normal game state. Use to get weight information. Therefore, in a jackpot state in which a large amount of game balls are paid out at one time, weight information corresponding to the weight of one game ball is obtained. Accuracy can be improved.

  The weight / number conversion unit 480 converts the weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 into the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 15 based on the average weight acquired by the weight information acquisition unit 479. . Specifically, the weight / number conversion unit 480 includes the above-described distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476, and acquires the above-described average weight. Based on the average weight, the weight / number converter 480 transfers the total weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 output from the distortion amount / weight converter 476 to the lower plate 15 corresponding to the total weight. Converted to the number of game balls accommodated. The weight / number conversion section 480 outputs the converted number of game balls to the lower bowl number display section 481.

  The lower bowl number display section 481 displays the number of game balls stored in the lower bowl 15 output from the weight / number conversion section 480. Therefore, even if there is a variation in the weight between the weight of some game balls paid out by the payout device 358 and the weight of other game balls, the accurate number of game balls can be continuously displayed.

  Next, the flow of the lower plate passage process, the calibration process, and the lower plate storage number calculation process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing by the audio ramp control device 262. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the lower plate passage process. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the calibration process. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the lower plate accommodation number calculation process.

  In FIG. 83, the CPU 551 in the audio lamp control device 262 executes a timer interrupt process, for example, every 2 msec.

  In step S1701, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the big hit flag is 1. The CPU 551 sets the big hit flag to 1 when the big hit start command is received, and sets the big hit flag to 0 when the big hit state is ended. If the big hit flag is 1, the flow advances to step S1702 to execute lower plate passage processing. If the jackpot flag is 0, the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 84, the lower plate passage process performed by the CPU 551 will be described.

  In step S1711, the CPU 551 gives an instruction to drive the switching driver 459A so that the passage switching member 458A switches from the first position 462A to the second position 463A. That is, the switching drive unit 459A rotates the passage switching member 458A from the first position 462A to the second position 463A to open the second lower plate guiding passage 483. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are guided to the second lower dish guiding passage 483.

  The CPU 551 previously stores a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) in the storage area g of the RAM 553 (step S1712), and stores the number of guidance derived from the count value of the second lower plate passage counter 478 in the storage area of the RAM 553. h (step S1713).

  In step S1714, the CPU 551 performs an operation of gh using the values of the storage areas g and h described above, and determines whether or not the operation result is 0. That is, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the number obtained by subtracting the number of leads from 10 balls stored in advance is 0. If it is 0, it indicates that 10 game balls have been guided, and the process advances to step S1715. If it is not 0, since the guiding of 10 game balls has not been completed, the process returns to step S1713, and the processes of steps S1713 and S1714 are repeated until the number of guided balls reaches 10 balls.

  In step S1715, the CPU 551 gives an instruction to drive the switching drive unit 459A so that the passage switching member 458A switches from the second position 463A to the first position 462A. That is, the switching drive unit 459A rotates the passage switching member 458A from the second position 463A to the first position 462A to open the upper plate guiding passage 454 and the lower plate guiding passage 455. Thereby, the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is guided to the upper plate guiding passage 454 or the lower plate guiding passage 455. This ends the process.

  The calibration process performed by the CPU 551 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1721, the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 of the CPU 551 reads the detection value (distortion amount) of the distortion sensor 475. In step S1722, the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 of the CPU 551 converts the read distortion amount into the total weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 at the time when the distortion amount is read. That is, the weight of 10 game balls is obtained.

  In step S1723, the CPU 551 stores the total weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 acquired in step S1722 in the storage area i of the RAM 553. In step S1724, the number of leads (10 balls described above) derived from the count value of the second lower plate 478 and the lower plate passage counter 578 is stored in the storage area j of the RAM 553.

  In step S1725, the weight information acquisition unit 479 of the CPU 551 uses the values of the storage areas i and j to calculate the total weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 as the number of leads ( 10 balls) (i （j) to obtain the average weight of one game ball.

  In step S1726, the weight information acquisition unit 479 of the CPU 551 stores the average weight of one game ball obtained in step S1725 in the RAM 553 described later. As described above, the calibration process is completed, and then, the lower plate storage number calculation process is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 86, a description will be given of the lower plate accommodation ball number calculation process performed by the CPU 551.

  In step S1731, the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 of the CPU 551 reads the detection value (distortion amount) of the distortion sensor 475. In step S1732, the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 of the CPU 551 converts the read distortion amount into the total weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 at the time when the distortion amount is read.

  In step S1733, the CPU 551 stores the total weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 obtained in step S1732 in the storage area k of the RAM 553. In step S1734, the average weight of one game ball acquired in step S1725 is stored in the storage area m of the RAM 553.

  In step S1735, the weight / number conversion unit 480 of the CPU 551 uses the values of the storage areas k and m to calculate the total weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 in the average weight stored in the average weight memory. (J ÷ k), and is converted into the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 at the time when the distortion amount is read. In step S1736, the weight / number conversion unit 480 of the CPU 551 stores the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 in the display memory.

  In step S1737, the lower bowl number display unit 481 displays the number of game balls accommodated in the lower bowl 15 stored in the display memory.

  In step S1738, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the big hit flag is 0. When the big hit state ends and the big hit flag becomes 0, the CPU 551 ends this processing. If the big hit flag is 1 without ending the big hit state, the processing of steps S1731 to S1737 is repeated until the big hit flag becomes 0. This is the end of the lower plate storage number calculation process.

  The above-described measuring unit 470 corresponds to the measuring unit of the present invention, the weight information obtaining unit 479 corresponds to the obtaining unit of the present invention, and the weight / number converting unit 480 corresponds to the converting unit of the present invention. The lower bowl number display section 481 corresponds to the display means of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10G of the seventh embodiment, the payout device 358 that pays out game balls having a predetermined value, and the lower plate 15 that stores the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 358 are provided. Using the measuring unit 470 for measuring the weight of the game ball accommodated in the plate 15 and the game ball paid out by the payout device 358 and accommodated by the lower plate 15, the weight corresponding to the weight of one game ball. The weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 is determined based on the weight information obtaining unit 479 for obtaining information and the weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 based on the weight information obtained by the weight information obtaining unit 479. And a weight / number conversion unit 480 (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in C1 described above). According to such a configuration, in obtaining the weight information corresponding to the weight of one game ball, the game ball paid out by the payout device 358 and stored in the lower plate 15 is used, so that the weight of the game ball is obtained. Weight information used for conversion from the number of game balls to the number of game balls is easily obtained. Based on the acquired weight information, the weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 is converted into the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15, so that the number of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 The number is determined exactly. Therefore, even during the game, it is easy to accurately grasp the number of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15.

Also, even if the weight of one gaming ball changes during the period when the gaming machine is installed,
The weight information used for converting the weight of game balls into the number of game balls reflects the weight of one game ball per game ball actually paid out from the payout device 358 and stored in the lower plate 15. Therefore, it is possible to keep track of the exact number of game balls.

  In addition, the weight information acquisition unit 479 acquires, as weight information, an average weight indicating the average weight of one game ball based on the weight obtained by measuring the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 with the measurement unit 470. The weight / number conversion unit 480 calculates the weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 based on the average weight acquired by the weight information acquisition unit 479. The number is converted into the number of balls (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in C2 described above). According to such a configuration, the weight information corresponding to the weight of one game ball is based on the weight obtained by measuring the game balls paid out by the lower plate 15 with the measurement unit 470, and the average of one game ball is obtained. It is obtained as the average weight indicating the typical weight. Based on the average weight, the weight of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 is converted into the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 15. Therefore, even if the weight of some of the game balls paid out by the payout device 358 and the weight of other game balls vary, it is possible to keep track of the exact number of game balls.

  In addition, the weight information acquisition unit 479 uses a game ball paid out by the payout device 358 and stored in the lower plate 15 in a jackpot state in which a greater chance of paying out game balls is obtained than in a normal game state. , And obtains weight information (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in C3 described above). According to such a configuration, the weight information corresponding to the weight of one game ball is obtained in the jackpot state in which a large amount of game balls are paid out at one time, so that the weight information can be obtained from a large number of game balls. The accuracy of the weight information can be improved by the amount.

  In addition, a lower bowl number display section 481 for displaying the number of game balls converted by the weight / number conversion section 480 is provided (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in C7 described above). Accordingly, the player can check the number of game balls displayed on the lower plate ball number display section 481 without confirming the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15; It becomes easy to accurately grasp the number of game balls accommodated in 15.

  In addition, the game device includes an effect execution unit that executes an effect according to the number of game balls converted by the weight / number conversion unit 480 (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in C8 described above). Since the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 is accurately obtained, it is possible to execute an effect in which the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 is accurately reflected.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10H according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine 10H of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a view for explaining load detection of a game ball or the like accommodated in the lower plate 15, (a) is a BB sectional view similar to FIG. 77 (a), and (b) is a view shown in FIG. It is CC sectional drawing similar to b).

  In the pachinko machine 10H according to the seventh embodiment, the weight of the lower plate 15 accommodating the game balls is measured, and the weight is converted into the number of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15. The machine 10H includes a load detection unit 570 that detects a load such as a game ball accommodated in the lower plate 15 and a player's hand placed on the lower plate 15, and utilizes a load detected by the load detection unit 570. The present embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10G of the seventh embodiment in that a configuration is provided in which the mode of the jackpot display effect executed by the first symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state is determined according to the tendency of the player.

  An effect button 580 is provided on the front edge of the lower plate 15. The effect button 580 includes, for example, effect buttons 580a and 580b used for selection.

  Next, the configuration of the load detection unit 570 will be described.

  The lower plate 15 has an outer wall portion 15p formed so as to rise from the outer bottom surface toward the outer side surface, and a lower plate main body for accommodating a game ball while being placed on the outer wall edge 15ra of the outer wall portion 15pa inside the outer wall portion 15pa. 15ua. A discharge port 15q for discharging game balls to the outside of the lower plate 15 is formed in the center of the outer wall portion 15pa. The lower plate main body 15ua is provided with a discharge port 15v so as to communicate with the discharge port 15q, and an outer peripheral edge 15wa is formed so as to vertically face the outer wall edge 15ra.

  In the outer wall portion 15pa, a concave portion 15s that is depressed downward is formed in a part of the outer wall edge 15ra, and a columnar strain generating body 475a made of metal is arranged with one end fixed to the edge of the concave portion 15s. Has been established. The lower plate main body 15ua has a convex portion 15x projecting downward on a part of the outer peripheral wall 15wa, and the other end of the strain body 475a is fixed to the convex portion 15x. A strain sensor 475 having a thin plate-shaped resistor called a strain gauge is provided between the fixed portion on one end side and the fixed portion on the other end side of the strain generating element 475a. Note that the strain sensor 475 is used as a general term for the resistor, a circuit described later, and an equation (program) for obtaining the amount of strain. For the description of the strain sensor 470, refer to the description of the strain sensor 470 of the seventh embodiment.

  Next, a configuration for paying out game balls to be paid out from the payout device 358 to the lower plate 15 will be described. In the present embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the game balls paid out during the jackpot state are guided to the upper plate, and are paid out to the lower plate 15 when the upper plate 19 overflows with the paid out game balls. Is adopted.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the present pachinko machine 10H will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 89 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10H according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a block diagram illustrating a main part of an electrical configuration according to the eighth embodiment.

  The present embodiment has a configuration for detecting a load such as a game ball accommodated in the lower plate 15 and a hand of a player placed on the lower plate 15, and the first symbol display device 42 is used by using the detected load. The present embodiment is different from the above-described first to seventh embodiments in that a configuration for determining the mode of the jackpot display effect executed in accordance with the tendency of the player is provided. Hereinafter, only the configuration specific to the eighth embodiment will be described, and the description of the first to seventh embodiments will be referred to for the other configurations common to the first to seventh embodiments.

  In the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 262 determines the mode of the jackpot display effect executed on the first symbol display device 42 according to the tendency of the player by using the load detected by the load detection unit 570. It has a function to do. A program for realizing the function is stored in the ROM 552 of the audio lamp control device 262. The program is executed using the CPU 551 and the RAM 553 of the audio lamp control device 262. The input / output port 555 of the audio lamp control device 262 includes a distortion sensor 475, a lower plate passage detection sensor 577 described later, and an operation of the player when a predetermined effect is performed during a normal game state or a big hit state. A button press detection sensor 581 and the like for detecting a player's operation on the effect button 580 that receives the button are connected to each other.

  The CPU 551 of the audio lamp control device 262 includes a distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476, a lower plate passage counter 578, a button pressing time counter 582, and an effect mode determination unit 579, which will be described in detail below. The distortion / weight conversion unit 476, the lower plate passage counter 578, the button press time counter 582, and the effect mode determination unit 579 are stored in the ROM 552 as programs executed by the CPU 551.

  The distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 inputs the detected value of the distortion amount output from the distortion sensor 475, converts the value into a weight corresponding to the detected value of the distortion amount, and outputs the weight. The weight corresponding to the detected value of the distortion amount is, for example, the total weight of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 or the hand of the player on the lower plate 15 in a state where no game balls are accommodated in the lower plate 15. If it is, it will be the weight of the player's hand. Note that the strain sensor 475 and the strain / weight conversion unit 476 constitute the load detection unit 570 of the present embodiment.

  A lower plate passage detection sensor 577 for detecting the passage of the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 is provided in the passage for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15 paid out from the payout device 358. The lower plate passage counter 578 inputs a signal output when the game ball passes from the lower plate passage detection sensor 577, and the number of game balls passing through the lower plate passage detection sensor 577, that is, from the payout device 358. The number of game balls to be paid out is counted. When counting the passage of a predetermined number of game balls, the lower plate passage counter 578 outputs a signal indicating the passage of the predetermined number of game balls to the effect mode determination unit 579. The predetermined number is, for example, 100 balls.

  The button press time counter 582 measures the time during which the press of the effect button 580 is accepted as valid. Specifically, the button pressing time counter 582 measures, for example, 3 seconds after the pressing request image requesting the player to press the effect button 580 is displayed on the first symbol display device 42, and measures within 3 seconds. When the button press detection sensor 581 detects that the effect button 580 has been pressed, the press of the effect button 580 is accepted as valid.

  The rendering mode determining unit 579 is executed by the first symbol display device 42 based on the load information based on the load detected by the load detection unit 570 and the reference information serving as a reference when comparing with the load information. The mode of the jackpot display effect is determined. The effect mode determining unit 579 sends the determined jackpot display effect mode to the display control device 45, and the display control device 45 causes the first symbol display device 42 to execute the jackpot display effect according to the received mode.

  Specifically, when the effect mode determination unit 579 detects the passage of 100 game balls from the lower plate passage counter 578 from the start of the big hit state, and receives a signal indicating the passage of 100 game balls. Next, load information based on the load detected by the load detection unit 570 is obtained. At the timing of detecting the passage of 100 game balls from the start of the jackpot state, although it depends on the number of game balls stored in the upper plate 19 at the start of the jackpot state, it generally depends on the paid game balls. The upper plate 19 overflows, and the overflowing game balls are accommodated in the lower plate 15. Therefore, at the timing of detecting the passage of 100 game balls from the start of the jackpot state, a tendency of the player to readily discharge or accumulate the game balls paid out to the lower plate 15 tends to appear.

  The effect mode determination unit 579 determines the mode of the jackpot display effect executed on the first symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state according to such a tendency of the player. The mode of the jackpot display effect is determined as described later.

  Next, the flow of the effect mode determination processing will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing by the audio lamp control device 262. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the rendering mode determination process.

  In FIG. 91, the CPU 551 in the audio lamp control device 262 executes a timer interrupt process, for example, every 2 msec.

  In step S1801, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the big hit flag is “1”. The CPU 551 sets the big hit flag to 1 when the big hit start command is received, and sets the big hit flag to 0 when the big hit state is ended. If the big hit flag is 1, the flow proceeds to step S1802, and the effect mode determination processing is executed. If the jackpot flag is 0, the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 92, an effect mode determination process performed by CPU 551 will be described.

  In step S1811, the CPU 551 reads the number of game balls that have passed the lower dish passage detection sensor 577 from the passage passage counter 578. In step S1812, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have passed the lower plate passage detection sensor 577 is 100. If the number of game balls that have passed the lower plate passage detection sensor 577 is 100 or more, the process proceeds to step S1813. If the number of game balls that have passed the lower plate passage detection sensor 577 is less than 100, 100 Steps S1811 to S1812 are repeated until the ball is reached.

  In step S1813, the CPU 551 reads the weight of the game ball obtained from the distortion amount output from the distortion sensor 475 from the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 as game ball weight information. In step S1814, the CPU 551 compares the read game ball weight information with the game ball reference weight information indicating the weight of the game ball as a reference when compared with the game ball weight information. Is greater than or equal to the game ball reference weight. When the determination result is less than the game ball reference weight, the process proceeds to step S1815, and when the determination result is equal to or more than the game ball reference weight, the process proceeds to step S1816.

  If the weight of one game ball is, for example, 5.4 g, the game ball reference weight information is, for example, 108 g corresponding to the weight of 20 game balls. Hereinafter, the 108 grams is referred to as a discharge state determination reference. In other words, when the game ball weight information is less than the discharge state determination reference (step S1814: No), the player playing the game at this time stores 20 game balls in the lower plate 15 in the big hit state. It can be said that the game ball is ejected by operating the ball release lever 17 before the ball is released. This indicates that the player tends to discharge the game balls immediately without storing them in the lower plate 15 in the big hit state. On the other hand, when the game ball weight information is equal to or greater than the discharge state determination reference (step S1814: Yes), the player playing the game at this time has a larger hit state on the lower plate 15 than in the former case. It can be seen that the player has a tendency to accumulate game balls.

  In step S1815, the CPU 551 determines that the first symbol display device 42 executes an effect pattern A described later as a predetermined effect.

  In step S1816, the CPU 551 uses the game ball weight information read out in step S1813 as game ball reference weight information different from that in step S1814, for example, a predetermined weight before the lower plate 15 becomes full (hereinafter referred to as a full front weight). Is determined. If the determination result indicates that the lower plate 15 is less than the full weight, the process proceeds to step S1817. If the determination result indicates that the lower plate 15 is equal to or more than the full weight, the process proceeds to step S1818.

  This weight before the fullness is hereinafter referred to as a fullness determination criterion. In other words, if the game ball weight information is less than the fullness determination reference (step S1816: No), the player playing the game at this time fills the lower plate 15 with the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 in the big hit state. It can be seen that the player has a low tendency to accumulate game balls until the player gets closer to. On the other hand, when the game ball weight information is equal to or greater than the fullness determination criterion (Step S1816: Yes), the player playing the game at this time is stored in the lower plate 15 in the jackpot state more than in the former case. It can be understood that the player tends to easily store the game balls to be filled until the lower plate 15 is almost full.

  In step S1817, the CPU 551 determines to cause the first symbol display device 42 to execute an effect pattern B described later as a predetermined effect. In step S1818, the CPU 551 determines to cause the first symbol display device 42 to execute an effect pattern C described later as a predetermined effect. This ends the process.

  Next, the effect patterns A to C determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are diagrams illustrating the respective jackpot effects in which effect patterns A to C are executed as time elapses. FIGS. 94 (a) to (f) are diagrams in which display images in the jackpot effect display of the effect pattern A are arranged over time. FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (f) are diagrams in which display images in each of the jackpot effect displays of the effect patterns B and C are arranged over time.

  Here, at least one jackpot state has already occurred and ended, and any of the effect patterns A to C has been determined by the effect mode determination unit 579 during the jackpot state. Is to be executed in the determined effect pattern. In FIG. 93, (a), (b), and (c) all show a jackpot state that ends in, for example, 15 rounds, but the player does not know what the jackpot state is, for example, after the end of the third round. It is a production pattern that does not know whether it will continue until the round.

  When the effect pattern A is determined, it is determined that the player tends to discharge the game balls immediately without storing them in the lower plate 15 during the previous jackpot state. Such a player tends to desire both to enjoy the jackpot effect and to shorten the time required for the jackpot state. Therefore, in the effect pattern A, it is not required to press the effect button 580 so that the player can know how many rounds the jackpot state continues. Instead, in the effect pattern A, in the interval time from the first round to the fourth round, a display effect that can be viewed by the player without having to press the effect button 580 is executed.

  When the effect pattern B is determined, during the previous jackpot state, there is no tendency to immediately discharge the game balls without storing the game balls in the lower plate 15, and the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 in the jackpot state are lowered. It is determined that the player is less likely to accumulate game balls until the game is nearly full. Such a player mainly enjoys the jackpot effect, and tends to be less conscious of shortening the time required for the jackpot state. Therefore, in the effect pattern B, in order to encourage the player to participate in the jackpot effect, it is required to press the effect button 580 so that the player knows how many rounds the jackpot state lasts. In addition, a display effect based on the player pressing the effect button 580 is executed.

  When the effect pattern C is determined, it is determined that the player has a tendency to easily store the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 until the lower plate 15 is almost full during the previous jackpot state. . Such a player enjoys the jackpot effect, but tends to take time to work in the jackpot state, such as processing game balls stored in the lower plate 15. Therefore, in the effect pattern C, similarly to the effect pattern B, the press of the effect button 580 is required in order for the player to know how many rounds the jackpot state continues, but the effect based on the press of the effect button 580 Is set longer than the effect display time in the effect pattern B. As a result, the time required for the operation in the jackpot state is secured for the player who takes time to work in the jackpot state.

  The display effect of the effect pattern A will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern A is a display effect in which the characters aim at the goal while walking in the maze. In the display effect, when the characters finish, the number of rounds in which the jackpot state continues is displayed. (A) and (b) are the display images of the first symbol display device 42 at the interval time after the end of the first round. In the display image of (a), a state in which the maze path branches into a path A and a path B, and a state in which a character enters the path A as indicated by an arrow line are displayed. In the display image of (b), the appearance of the character walking along the passage A is indicated by an arrow line. Next, (c) and (d) are the display images of the first symbol display device 42 at the interval time after the end of the second round. In the display image of (c), a state in which the maze path branches into the path C and the path D, and a state in which a character enters the path D as indicated by an arrow line are displayed. In the display image of (d), the appearance of the character walking along the passage D is indicated by an arrow line. Next, (e) and (f) are the display images of the first symbol display device 42 at the interval time after the end of the third round. The display image of (e) shows a state in which the maze path branches into a path E and a path F, and a state in which a character enters the path E as indicated by an arrow line. In the display image of (f), a character of “GOAL” indicating that the character has reached the goal as a result of the character traveling along the passage E, and a character of “15 round” indicating that the jackpot state lasts up to 15 rounds And are displayed.

  As described above, in the jackpot effect of the effect pattern A, the player can know how many rounds the jackpot state continues after the end of the third round without operating the effect button 580. Thereby, in the jackpot effect of the effect pattern A determined by the effect mode determination unit 579, it is possible for a skilled player to enjoy both the jackpot effect and shorten the time required for the jackpot state. .

  The display effect of the effect pattern B will be described with reference to FIG. Like the effect pattern A, the effect pattern B is a display effect in which the characters aim at the goal while walking in the maze, but the player is required to select a path in the maze. However, in the display effect of the effect pattern B, if the result of the lottery is a jackpot that lasts up to 15 rounds, the goal can be finally reached regardless of which path the player selects. Also in the display effect of the effect pattern B, when the character reaches the goal, the number of rounds in which the jackpot state continues is displayed. If the result of the lottery is reach loss, no matter which path the player selects, the goal cannot be finally reached.

  FIGS. 95 (a) and (b) are display images of the first symbol display device 42 at an interval time after the end of the first round. In the display image of (a), a state in which the maze path is branched into the path A and the path B, and the characters "Select a path with the A and B buttons" are displayed. The display image of (a) is displayed in the first three seconds of the eight-second interval time. In the display image of (b), the character “safe” indicating that the result of the selection of the A button by the player is correct, and the appearance of the character walking along the passage A as indicated by the arrow line are shown. Is displayed. The display image of (b) is displayed in the last 5 seconds of the 8 second interval time. Next, (c) and (d) are the display images of the first symbol display device 42 at the interval time after the end of the second round. In the display image of (c), a state in which the maze path is branched into the path C and the path D, and the characters "Select a path with the A and B buttons" are displayed. Pressing the A button selects the path C, and pressing the B button selects the path D. The display image of (c) is displayed in the first three seconds of the eight-second interval time. In the display image of (d), the character “safe” indicating that the result of the player selecting the B button is the correct answer, and the appearance of the characters walking along the passage D are indicated by arrow lines. The display image of (d) is displayed in the last 5 seconds of the 8 second interval time. Next, (e) and (f) are the display images of the first symbol display device 42 at the interval time after the end of the third round. In the display image of (e), a state in which the passage of the cave branches into the passage E and the passage F, and the characters "Select a passage with the A and B buttons" are displayed. Pressing the A button selects the path E, and pressing the B button selects the path F. The display image of (e) is displayed in the first three seconds of the eight-second interval time. In the display image of (f), the character of "congratulations GOAL" indicating that the result of the player selecting the A button is correct, and the character of "15 round" indicating that the jackpot state continues for 15 rounds And are displayed. The display image of (f) is displayed in the last 5 seconds of the 8 second interval time.

  As described above, in the jackpot effect of the effect pattern B, the player can enjoy the display effect of approaching the goal while operating the effect button 580, and at the end of the third round by reaching the goal. You can know how long the state lasts. As a result, for players who are not skilled but are familiar with the game, by providing many opportunities for players to participate in the jackpot production, even if the time required for the jackpot state becomes slightly longer, the jackpot production Can fulfill the purpose of having fun.

  The jackpot display effect of the effect pattern C has the same contents as the jackpot display effect of the effect pattern B shown in FIG. 95, but the display images shown in (b), (d) and (f) and the images related thereto are displayed. The point that the duration is 8 seconds is different from the jackpot display effect of the effect pattern B. As described above, in the jackpot effect of the effect pattern C, the player can enjoy the display effect of approaching the goal while operating the effect button 580, and the interval period remaining after the operation of the effect button 580 is long. Thus, it is possible to perform the work required for the big hit state such as the operation of the ball removing lever 17 with a sufficient time by using the time taken for a long time. As a result, for a player unfamiliar with the game, the interval time can be set to be long by the time required for digesting the jackpot state, and the jackpot effect can be enjoyed with a margin.

  The first symbol display device 42 described above corresponds to the effect executing means of the present invention. The above-described load detection unit 570 corresponds to the load detection unit of the present invention. The above-described effect mode determining unit 579 corresponds to an effect mode determining unit of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10G of the eighth embodiment, the load externally applied to the lower plate 15 is detected by the load detection unit 570, and the load information based on the load detected by the load detection unit 570; Based on the load information and reference information serving as a reference for comparison, a predetermined effect mode to be executed by the first symbol display device 42 is determined by the effect mode determination unit 579 (for example, in (D1) described above). Corresponding to the described gaming machine). The load externally applied to the lower plate 15 is, for example, a load of a game ball accommodated in the lower plate 15, a load of a player's hand placed on the lower plate 15, and the like. For example, a player who tends to store game balls in the lower plate 15 by detecting the load of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 or immediately discharges the game balls without storing them in the lower plate 15 Information on the tendency of the player, such as whether the player has a tendency, can be obtained as the load information. Further, for example, by detecting the load of the player's hand placed on the lower plate 15, information on the degree of interest of the player in a predetermined effect can be obtained as load information. Thereby, by appropriately setting the reference information serving as a reference when comparing with the load information, the predetermined effect mode performed by the first symbol display device 42 based on the load information and the reference information is changed to a game. Is determined so as to be a mode suitable for the person. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player.

  The above-mentioned load information is game ball load information indicating the load of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15. The above-mentioned reference information is game ball reference load information indicating a load of a game ball as a reference when compared with the game ball load information. The mode of the predetermined effect performed by the first symbol display device 42 is determined based on the game ball load information and the game ball reference load information (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (D2) described above). . Thus, the predetermined effect mode determined by effect mode determining unit 579 is a player who tends to store game balls in lower plate 15 or immediately discharges without storing game balls in lower plate 15. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the tendency of the player, which is grasped from the tendency when the player accommodates the game ball in the lower plate 15, such as the tendency of the player, is reflected. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  In addition, the above-mentioned reference load information indicates that during a period in which a game ball is paid out to the lower plate 15 in a special game state such as a big hit state, the ball release lever 17 receives an operation of the player, and the lower plate 15 This is game ball reference load information indicating a discharge state determination criterion indicating whether or not the discharge state is easy to discharge to the outside. The predetermined effect mode determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 is different depending on whether the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion and when the load information is equal to or lower than the discharge state determination criterion (for example, as described above). (Corresponding to the gaming machine described in (D3)). As a result, the predetermined effect mode determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 is such that the lower plate 15 is operated by operating the ball release lever 17 during the period in which the game balls are paid out to the lower plate 15 in the special game state. In a manner that reflects the tendency of the player, which is grasped from the tendency when discharging the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 as to whether or not the player is easy to create a discharge state that is easy to discharge outside. Can be. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  Also, when the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion and is not determined to be in the discharge state, the load information is equal to the discharge state determination criterion or the load information is lower than the discharge state determination criterion. When it is determined that there is a certain effect, a predetermined effect with a shorter time from the start to the end of the predetermined effect is determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (D4) described above). . In the former case, it can be determined that the player has a tendency to store game balls in the lower plate 15. In the latter case, it can be determined that the player tends to discharge the game balls immediately without storing them in the lower plate 15. The player in the latter case does not want to spend extra time, such as operating the ball pull lever 17 while worrying about the accommodation state of the lower plate 15 during the jackpot state, compared to the player in the former case. Tend. Therefore, in the latter case, the predetermined effect in which the time from the start to the end of the predetermined effect is shorter is more easily determined in the latter case, so that the predetermined effect reflects the tendency of the player. It can be. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  Also, when the load information exceeds the discharge state determination criterion and is not determined to be in the discharge state, the load information is equal to the discharge state determination criterion or the load information is lower than the discharge state determination criterion. When it is determined that there is a certain effect, a predetermined effect with a small number of appearances of the operation request for operating the effect button 580 is determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 (for example, in the gaming machine described in (D5) above). Correspondence). The player in the latter case does not want to spend extra time, such as operating the ball pull lever 17 while worrying about the accommodation state of the lower plate 15 during the jackpot state, compared to the player in the former case. Tend. Therefore, in the latter case, the player may not like an effect in which the number of appearances of operation requests for operating the effect button 580 is too large. Therefore, in the latter case, the predetermined effect in which the number of appearances of the operation request for operation of the effect button 580 is smaller is more easily determined in the latter case, so that the predetermined effect reflects the tendency of the player. May be adopted. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  In addition, the above-mentioned game ball reference load information indicates that during the period in which the game balls are paid out to the lower plate 15 in the special game state, the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 become the caution state almost full of the lower plate 15. This is information indicating a full attention criterion that indicates that The predetermined effect determined by the effect mode determination unit 579 is different depending on whether the load information exceeds the full attention criterion and when the load information is equal to the full attention criterion or when the load information is lower than the full attention criterion ( For example, it corresponds to the gaming machine described in (D6) above). Accordingly, the predetermined effect mode determined by the game mode determining means is such that the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 are filled with the lower plate 15 during the period in which the game balls are paid out to the lower plate 15 in the special game state. , It is possible to adopt a mode that reflects the tendency of the player, which is grasped from the tendency of accommodating game balls in the lower plate 15 as to whether or not the player is likely to create a full caution state close to. Therefore, since the predetermined effect approaches the tendency of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  Next, a description will be given of a pachinko machine 10I according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. Referring back to FIG. 90 described above.

  In the pachinko machine 10H according to the eighth embodiment, the mode of the jackpot display effect executed by the first symbol display device 42 during the jackpot state is adjusted according to the tendency of the player by using the load detected by the load detection unit 570. Although determined, the pachinko machine 10I of the ninth embodiment uses the load detected by the load detection unit 570 to produce a chance effect that is executed on the first symbol display device 42 during a gaming state that is not a jackpot state. Is different from the pachinko machine 10H of the eighth embodiment in that a configuration is provided in which the mode is determined according to the tendency of the player. Note that the external configuration of the pachinko machine 10I, the load detection unit 570, and the like are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10H of the eighth embodiment, and therefore, the description of the eighth embodiment will be referred to.

  Using the load detected by the load detection unit 570, the sound ramp control device 262 adjusts the mode of the chance effect performed on the first symbol display device 42 during the game state other than the big hit state according to the tendency of the player. It has the function to decide.

  The distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 inputs the detected value of the distortion amount output from the distortion sensor 475, converts the value into a weight corresponding to the detected value of the distortion amount, and outputs the weight. The weight corresponding to the detected value of the distortion amount is, for example, the weight when the hand of the player is placed on the lower plate 15 and the hand of the player placed on the lower plate 15 is separated from the lower plate 15. The weight of the case. As described later, it is possible to determine whether or not the load generated on the lower plate 15 is due to the placement of the player's hand by determining the temporal change of the load generated on the lower plate 15.

  The button pressing time counter 582 measures, for example, three seconds during which pressing of the effect button 580 is accepted as valid. As described below, it is determined whether or not the player has pressed the effect button 580 within three seconds from a request to press the effect button 580 with the hand resting on the lower plate 15.

  The rendering mode determination unit 579 executed by the above-described function includes load information based on the load of the player's hand detected by the load detection unit 570, and operation information on the operation of the player detected by the button press detection sensor 581. Based on this, the mode of the chance effect performed by the first symbol display device 42 is determined.

  The effect mode determination unit 579 determines whether the load detected by the load detection unit 570 is due to the load on the player's hand by determining the temporal change in the weight applied to the lower plate 15. Specifically, effect mode determination unit 579 reads weight applied to lower plate 15 from load detection unit 570 at extremely short time intervals. If the difference between the two weights before and after is greater than or equal to the reference weight, the weight difference is due to the player's hand placed on the lower plate 15 being separated from the lower plate 15. The effect mode determining unit 579 determines from the weight difference that the weight on the lower plate 15 is due to the hand of the player.

  Next, the effect mode determination unit 579 determines whether or not the player has released the hand placed on the lower plate 15 from the lower plate 15 and pressed the effect button 580 within 3 seconds from the request for pressing the effect button 580. I do. Specifically, the effect mode determination unit 579 detects the pressing of the effect button 580 from the button pressing time counter 582 within three seconds after the weight on the lower plate 15 is determined to be due to the hand of the player. The above determination is made depending on whether or not the notification has been received. The player performing the pressing operation determined in this way is waiting for a request to press the effect button 580 with the hand placed on the lower plate 15, and looks at the request for pressing the effect button 580 and moves the hand from the lower plate 15. Then, there is a tendency that the effect button 580 is pressed within three seconds from the request for pressing the effect button 580. Therefore, such a player tends to be a player who is quite aggressive to a chance effect accompanied by a pressing operation of the effect button 580 (a player whose effect pattern A described later is determined). In addition, some players press the effect button 580 within three seconds from the request for pressing the effect button 580 without placing their hands on the lower plate 15. The player determined in this manner tends to have a tendency that the interest in the chance effect accompanied by the pressing operation of the effect button 580 is normal (a player whose effect pattern B described later is determined). In addition, some players do not press the effect button 580 within three seconds from the request to press the effect button 580 even though their hands are placed on the lower plate 15. The player determined in this manner operates the mobile phone with the other hand while placing one hand on the lower plate 15 and tends to appear to be less concentrated on the chance production ( A player whose effect pattern C is described later). In addition, some players do not place their hands on the lower plate 15 and do not press the effect button 580 within three seconds from the request for pressing the effect button 580. The player determined in this manner tends to have a tendency not to show any interest in the chance effect at all (the player whose effect pattern D is described later).

  The effect mode determination unit 579 determines the mode of the chance effect executed on the first symbol display device 42 according to such a tendency of the player.

  Next, the flow of the effect mode determination processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the sound ramp control device 262 according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the lower plate load detection / weight conversion process. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the rendering mode determination process.

  In FIG. 96, the CPU 551 in the audio lamp control device 262 executes a timer interrupt process, for example, every 2 msec.

  In step S1851, the CPU 551 determines whether the display command to be transmitted to the display control device 45 is a command including a chance effect. If the display command includes a chance effect, the process proceeds to lower plate load detection / weight conversion processing in step S1852. When step S1852 ends, the flow proceeds to the rendering mode determination process in step S1853. If the display command does not include a chance effect, the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 97, the lower plate load detection / weight conversion process performed by the CPU 551 will be described.

  In step S1861, the CPU 551 determines whether or not a press request for causing the player to press the effect button 580 in the chance effect has been started. The timing at which the pressing request is started is determined based on whether or not the timing at which the image for the pressing request has been displayed on the first symbol display device 42 has been reached. If a press request is started, the process advances to step S1862. If the press request has not been started, step S1861 is repeated until the press request is started.

  In step S1862, the CPU 551 reads the detected value of the load generated on the lower plate 15, that is, the detected value of the distortion sensor 475. In step S1863, the CPU 551 converts the read detection value into a weight by the distortion / weight converter 476. Steps S1862 and 1863 are performed at short time intervals, and are performed, for example, every 10 msec. Weight information indicating the converted weight is stored in the RAM 553 together with time information indicating the detected time.

  In step S1864, CPU 551 determines whether or not the request to press effect button 580 has been completed. The timing at which the pressing request is terminated is determined based on whether or not the timing at which the image for the pressing request displayed on the first symbol display device 42 has disappeared. When the pressing request is ended, the present process is ended, and the process proceeds to the effect mode determination process. If the pressing request is not completed, steps S1862 and 1863 are repeated until the pressing request is completed.

  With reference to FIG. 98, a description will be given of an effect mode determination process performed by the CPU 551.

  In step S1871, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the press of the effect button 580 is detected by the button press detection sensor 581 within three seconds after the start of the request for pressing the effect button 580. If it is detected that the effect button 580 is pressed within three seconds, the process proceeds to step S1872. If the press of the effect button 580 is not detected within three seconds, the process proceeds to step S1877 described later.

  In step S1872, the CPU 551 stores, in the storage area n of the RAM 553, weight information having time information immediately before the press of the effect button 580 is detected. Next, in step S1873, the CPU 551 stores the weight information including the time information immediately after the detection of the press of the effect button 580 in the storage area o of the RAM 553. That is, the storage area o stores weight information having time information that is 10 msec later than the time information included in the weight information stored in the storage area n.

  In step S1874, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the weight difference obtained by subtracting the weight indicated by the weight information stored in the storage area o from the weight indicated by the weight information stored in the storage area n is equal to or greater than the reference weight. The reference weight is an average weight generated on the lower plate 15 when the player places his / her hand on the lower plate 15. If the weight difference is equal to or greater than the reference weight, it is determined that the weight difference is due to the player releasing the lower plate 15 to press the effect button 580. When it is determined in this manner, the process proceeds to step S1875, and the CPU 551 determines the mode of the chance effect after the next time as the effect pattern A. The effect pattern A will be described later. When the weight difference is equal to or less than the reference weight, it is determined that the player's hand is not placed on the lower plate 15. That is, it is determined that the player has pressed the effect button 580 from a state where the hand is not placed on the lower plate 15. When it is determined in this way, the process proceeds to step S1876, and the CPU 551 determines the mode of the chance effect after the next time as the effect pattern B. The effect pattern B will be described later.

  If the pressing of the effect button 580 is not detected within three seconds in step S1871 described above, in step S1877, the CPU 551 stores the weight information including the time information immediately before the end of the pressing request in the storage area p of the RAM 553. Next, in step S1878, the CPU 551 stores, in the storage area q of the RAM 553, weight information including time information immediately after the end of the press request. That is, the storage area q stores weight information having time information that is 10 msec later than the time information included in the weight information stored in the storage area p.

  In step S1879, the CPU 551 determines whether or not the weight difference obtained by subtracting the weight indicated by the weight information stored in the storage area q from the weight indicated by the weight information stored in the storage area p is equal to or greater than the reference weight. The reference weight is the same reference weight as in step S1874. If the weight difference is equal to or larger than the reference weight, it is determined that the player has put his / her hand on the lower plate 15 but has not pressed the effect button 580. If it is determined in this way, the process proceeds to step S1880, and the CPU 551 determines the mode of the chance effect after the next time as the effect pattern C. The effect pattern C will be described later. When the weight difference is equal to or less than the reference weight, the player does not place his hand on the lower plate 15. It is determined that effect button 580 has not been pressed. If it is determined in this way, the process proceeds to step S1881, and the mode of the chance production in the next and subsequent times is determined as the production pattern D. The effect pattern D will be described later.

  In step S1882, when the mode of the chance production is determined to be one of the production patterns A to D, the weight information and the reference weight stored in the storage areas n, o, p, and q are deleted, and the present processing is performed. finish.

  Next, the effect patterns A to D determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating each chance effect of effect patterns A to D as time elapses. FIGS. 100 (a) to (f) are diagrams in which display images in the chance effect display of the effect pattern A are arranged over time.

  Here, at least one chance effect has already occurred and ended, and any of the effect patterns A to D has been determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 during the chance effect. It is assumed that the effect is executed in one of the effect patterns A to D determined.

  In FIG. 99, effect patterns A to D are patterns of chance effects performed during the reach effect period in the variable display pattern in which the time from the start to the end of the change is the same. The effect patterns A to D are effect patterns in which the number of times the request for pressing the effect button 580 in the chance effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 42 and the time during which the press request is displayed are different. The effect patterns A to D are assumed to be effect patterns executed when a common lottery result, for example, a predetermined reach effect when a predetermined jackpot is won is executed. The effect pattern A can be displayed for a maximum of three press requests for three seconds. In the effect pattern B, a press request for three seconds is provided as in the effect pattern A, but the effect pattern B can be displayed only up to two times, one less than the number of times the effect pattern A is displayed. The effect pattern C is provided with a four-second press request that is one second longer than the effect patterns A and B, but the number of display times can be displayed up to twice as in the effect pattern B. In the effect pattern D, unlike the effect patterns A to C, a press request is not displayed.

  The display effect of the effect pattern A will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern A is an effect pattern in the case where the player is determined to be a very active player in the chance effect involving the pressing operation of the effect button 580. The display effect of the effect pattern A is a display effect in which when a soap bubble pops, a note appears in a manner that suggests a lottery result from the pop. In this display effect, the setting is such that the greater the number of notes, the higher the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. (A) and (b) show a case where the image of a character “Pressing the A button breaks the soap bubble” indicating the first press request and the effect button 580 are pressed in response to the first press request. It is an image after the displayed soap bubble was broken. In (a) and (b), when the soap bubble pops, one note appears. (C) and (d) show the image of the character "Pressing the A button breaks the soap bubble" indicating the second press request and the case where the effect button 580 is pressed in response to the second press request. It is an image after the displayed soap bubble was broken. In (c) and (d), when the soap bubble pops, two different notes appear, and the expectation for the jackpot win is higher than in (a) and (b). (E) and (f) show the image of the character “The soap bubble will break when the A button is pressed” indicating the third press request and the effect button 580 is pressed in response to the third press request. It is an image after the displayed soap bubble was broken. In (e) and (f), when the soap bubble pops, three different notes appear, and the degree of expectation for the jackpot winning is higher than in (c) and (d).

  As described above, in the chance effect of the effect pattern A, when the lottery result is a winning in the jackpot state, the player who is active in the chance effect increases the number of notes as the operation of the effect button 580 is repeated. You can know the exact jackpot expectation while participating in fun display effects such as

  The display effect of the effect pattern B will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern B is an effect pattern when it is determined that the interest in the chance effect accompanying the pressing operation of the effect button 580 is normal. The contents of the display effects of (a) to (e) are the same as the effect pattern A, but the contents of the display effects of (e) and (f) do not appear in the effect pattern B. As described above, when it is determined that the interest in the chance production involving the pressing operation of the production button 580 is normal, the player can depress the production button 580 in response to the two pressing requests and have the most enjoyable image. (F), that is, the image with the highest jackpot expectation cannot be seen, so that the exact jackpot expectation cannot be known.

  The display effect of the effect pattern C will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern C is an effect pattern in a case where it is determined that the user is not concentrated on the chance effect so much that the user operates the mobile phone with the other hand while placing one hand on the lower plate 15. . The content of the display effect is the same as the effect pattern B, but in the effect pattern C, the time during which the pressing request of (a) and (c) is displayed is the time of (a) and (c) of the effect patterns A and B. The time is set to 4 seconds, which is 1 second longer than the time during which the press request is displayed. This makes it easier to notice the chance effect as much as the pressing request is longer than the effect patterns A and B.

  The display effect of the effect pattern D will be described with reference to FIG. The effect pattern D is an effect pattern when it is determined that the player has no interest in the chance effect at all. The effect patterns D are (a) to (d). However, in (a) and (c), the character "Pressing the A button breaks the soap bubble" requesting pressing of the effect button 580 is not displayed. In other words, in the effect pattern D, a display effect that does not issue a request to press the effect button 580 is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player who does not like the chance effect accompanied by the request for pressing the effect button 580 to show the request for pressing the effect button 580 forcibly to reduce the interest in the chance effect of such a player. be able to.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10I of the ninth embodiment, the load externally applied to the lower plate 15 is detected by the load detection unit 570, and the load information based on the load detected by the load detection unit 570; Based on the operation information on the player's operation detected by the button press detection sensor 581 and the button press time counter 582, the predetermined effect mode executed by the first symbol display device 42 is determined by the effect mode determining unit 579. (For example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (D7) above). The load externally applied to the lower plate 15 is, for example, a load of a game ball accommodated in the lower plate 15, a load of a player's hand placed on the lower plate 15, and the like. For example, a player who tends to store game balls in the lower plate 15 by detecting the load of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 or immediately discharges the game balls without storing them in the lower plate 15 Information on the tendency of the player, such as whether the player has a tendency, can be obtained as the load information. Further, for example, by detecting the load of the player's hand placed on the lower plate 15, information on the degree of interest of the player in a predetermined effect can be obtained as load information. Based on the load information thus obtained and the operation information on the player's operation detected by the button press detection sensor 581 and the button press time counter 582, a predetermined effect executed by the first symbol display device 42 If the mode is determined, the predetermined effect in the mode suitable for the player is determined by the first symbol display device 42. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player.

  The above-described reference information is operation detection information indicating whether or not a player operation has been detected by the button press detection sensor 581 and the button press time counter 582. The predetermined effect determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 is determined based on hand load information and operation detection information (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (D8) described above). Thus, the predetermined effect mode determined by the effect mode determination unit 579 can be a mode that reflects the level of interest of the player in the game. Therefore, since the predetermined effect reflects the level of interest of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  Further, the predetermined effect determined by the effect mode determining unit 579 is different between the case where there is hand load information and operation detection information and the case where there is hand load information and no operation detection information (for example, as described above). (Corresponding to the gaming machine described in (D9)). When there is hand load information and operation detection information, there is a tendency that the player is highly interested in a predetermined effect, such as waiting for the timing of operating the effect button 580 with the hand placed on the lower plate 15. There is. When there is hand load information and no operation detection information, there is a tendency that the player is less interested in a predetermined effect as compared to the former case. This makes it possible to adopt a mode in which the level of interest of the player in the predetermined effect is reflected. Therefore, since the predetermined effect reflects the level of interest of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  In addition, when there is hand load information and there is operation detection information, a predetermined effect with a longer time from the start to the end of the predetermined effect is more than when there is hand load information and no operation detection information. Is determined by the rendering mode determination unit 579 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (D10) described above). The latter case tends to be a player who is more interested in the predetermined effect than the former case. For this reason, in the latter case, the predetermined effect in which the time from the start to the end of the predetermined effect is shorter is more easily determined in the latter case, thereby reflecting the player's interest in the predetermined effect. It can be set as the embodiment made. Therefore, since the predetermined effect reflects the level of interest of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  In addition, when there is hand load information and there is operation detection information, the predetermined number of occurrences of operation requests for operation of the effect button 580 is greater when there is hand load information and there is no operation detection information. Is determined by the rendering mode determination unit 579 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in (D11)). The latter case tends to be a player who is more interested in the predetermined effect than the former case. For this reason, in the latter case, the predetermined effect with a smaller number of appearances of the operation request for operating the effect button 580 is more easily determined in the latter case, thereby reflecting the interest of the player in the predetermined effect. May be adopted. Therefore, since the predetermined effect reflects the level of interest of the player, the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player can be improved.

  A slot machine 600 according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the slot machine 600 of the tenth embodiment with the front door closed. FIG. 102 is a front view of the slot machine 600 according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the inside of the slot machine 600 with the front door 612 removed. FIG. 104 is a rear view of the front door 612.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the slot machine 600 of this embodiment includes a main body 611 and a front door 612 located on the front side of the main body 611. As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the front door 612 is attached to the main body 611 so as to be rotatable (openable and closable) with the left side thereof as a rotation axis J1. In the slot machine 600, as shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the front door 612 and the main body 611 can be locked by the locking device 620 with the front door 612 closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the front door 612 has an upper lamp 613 that is turned on and blinks as the game progresses, and emits various sound effects as the game progresses, and provides the player with a game state. 614, 614 for notifying the display, a liquid crystal display 615 for displaying various display contents, and a game panel 630 capable of seeing through the left torso L, the middle torso M, and the right torso R (see FIG. 103), respectively. And an operation unit 650 provided with various buttons 651, 653 to 656, 661, 663, a start lever 652, and a medal slot 657 near a substantially middle stage, and a lower display displaying a model name, a character related to a game, and the like. Unit 616 and a receiving device for receiving a medal having a predetermined value as a game medium paid out from the first medal payout port 617A and the second medal discharge port 617B. And 715A are mounted. The tray device 715A includes a first tray 715 that stores medals paid out by the hopper 686 and discharged from the first medal discharge port 617A, and a medal discharged by the hopper 686 and discharged from the second medal discharge port 617B. And two types of receiving trays 722 for storing the same.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the game panel 630 includes exposure windows 631L, 631M, which expose the outside during stop or rotation of the left torso L, the middle torso M, and the right torso R (see FIG. 103). 631R, five bet lamps 632, 633, 633, 634, 634 disposed on the left side of the exposure window 631L, and the inside of the slot machine disposed below the exposure windows 631L, 631M, 631R. The number of credits display section 635 that displays the number of credits stored in the game, and the number of times that the JAC (jack) can be entered at the time of the big bonus and the number of times that the JAC symbol remains to be formed at the time of the JAC game are displayed. Game number display section 636 and the number of payouts for displaying the number of payouts when the same symbols are arranged on the payline. And a display unit 637. Further, the game panel 630 includes an accommodation number display section 781 for displaying the number of medals accommodated in the first tray 715 converted by the weight / number conversion section 780.

  As shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the operation unit 650 includes a credit button 651, a start lever 652, a left turn stop button 653, and a middle turn stop button provided on the front part of the front door 612. 654, a right turn stop button 655, a return button 656, a medal slot 657 provided in a horizontal step portion of the front door 612, a single bet button 661, and a max bet button 663. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 103, a power supply box 685 provided with a power switch 681 for supplying power to each part of the slot machine 600 when it is turned on, and guidance of overflowing medals to the outside, as shown in FIG. A hopper 686 including an auxiliary tank 687 having an opening 689 for storing inserted medals and a dispensing device 688 for dispensing medals in the auxiliary tank 687, a main control device 670 and a display control device 694 described later. , Etc. are mounted. The main control device 670 is attached to a position above the main body 611, and the display control device 694 is attached to an upper portion on the back side of the front door 612.

  The medal paid out from the payout device 688 is guided to the first payout passage 692A (see FIG. 105) via the first opening 693A, and is stored in the first tray 715 via the first medal payout port 617A. In some cases, it is guided to the second payout passage 692B via the second opening 693B, and stored in the second tray 722 via the second medal discharge port 617B.

  Next, a configuration for switching the guide destination of the paid-out medals will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 105A and 105B are diagrams illustrating the operation of the passage switching mechanism 757. FIG. 105A illustrates the closing of the second payout passage 692B, and FIG. 105B illustrates the opening of the second payout passage 692B.

  The payout device 688 includes a capturing rotary plate 730 provided with a plurality of capturing units for capturing medals stored in the auxiliary tank 687 one by one, a payout motor 732 for rotating the capturing rotary plate 730, and the payout motor 732. And a medal emission mechanism (not shown) for receiving the medals from the capturing rotating plate 730 rotated by the mechanism and emitting the received medals. In addition, the payout device 688 includes a first guide path 782 communicating with the first payout path 692A and a second guideway communicating with the second payout path 692B as paths through which medals discharged from the medal discharging mechanism are guided. And a passage 783. In addition, the payout device 688 includes a passage switching mechanism 757 that switches whether the medal is to be guided to the first guidance passage 782 or the second guidance passage 783. A rotation detection sensor 733 for detecting the rotation angle is attached to the payout motor 732.

  The passage switching mechanism 757 is a member that switches the passage, and is a member that can move to a first position 762 that opens the first guide passage 782 and a second position 763 that opens the second guide passage 783. And a switching drive unit 759 that drives the passage switching member 758 to move to the first position 762 or the second position 763. The passage switching member 758 is formed of a movable plate whose base end is rotatably supported in the dispensing device 688 and whose front end rotates in the forward and reverse directions. The switching drive unit 759 has a rotary shaft connected to the base end side of the movable plate, and is configured by a rotary solenoid disposed outside the passage.

  In a normal game state, the switching drive unit 759 has the passage switching member 758 at the first position 762 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the second guiding passage 783 is closed and the first guiding passage 782 is opened, so that the medals paid out from the payout device 688 are guided to the first guiding passage 782 and stored in the first tray 715. When the big bonus is won and the bonus game is started, the switching drive unit 759 moves the passage switching member 758 from the first position 762 to the second position 763 as shown in FIG. Therefore, the first guide passage 782 is closed and the second guide passage 783 is opened, so that the medals paid out from the payout device 688 are guided to the second guide passage 783 and stored in the second tray 722. The switching drive unit 759 maintains the state where the passage switching member 758 is located at the second position 763 from the start of the bonus game until a predetermined number (for example, 10) medals are paid out by the payout device 688.

  After a predetermined number of medals have been paid out during the bonus game or after the bonus game has ended, the switching drive unit 759 moves the passage switching member 758 to the first position 762 again.

  The tray device 715A is provided with a measuring unit 770 for measuring the weight of medals stored in the first tray 715 and the second tray 722. Specifically, the first tray 715 is provided with a first measuring unit 770A for measuring the weight of the medal stored in the first tray 715, and the second tray 722 is stored in the second tray 722. A second measuring unit 770B for measuring the weight of the medal is provided. The first measurement unit 770A and the second measurement unit 770B have a configuration including a later-described first distortion sensor 775A and a second distortion sensor 775B for detecting a distortion amount, similarly to the measurement unit 470 of the seventh embodiment. Will be referred to the description of the measurement unit 470.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the slot machine 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of slot machine 600. FIG. 107 is a block diagram illustrating main components of an electrical configuration according to the tenth embodiment.

  The main control device 670 is configured as a microcomputer with a CPU 671 at the center, and a ROM 672 for storing a processing program, a RAM 673 for temporarily storing data, and an input / output port 674 are connected by a bus 675. The display control device 694 is configured as a microcomputer with the CPU 671 at the center, and controls the display content of the liquid crystal display 615 based on an output signal from the main control device 670.

  The input side of the main controller 670 is detected from a credit button 651, a start lever 652, a left reel stop button 653, a middle reel stop button 654, a right reel stop button 655, a return button 656, and a medal slot 657. A first payout number counter 778A and a second payout number counter for counting the number of medals paid out by the payout device 688 are connected together with a medal detection sensor for detecting a medal, a single bet button 661, and a max bet button 663. .

  On the output side of the main controller 670, a left reel L, a middle reel M, a right reel R, bet lamps 632, 633, 633, 634, 634, a credit number display section 635, a game number display section 636, and a payout number display section In addition to the 637, the hopper 686, and the display control device 694, a number-of-accommodated-sheets display unit 781 and a switching drive unit 759 for operating the above-described passage switching member 758 are connected.

  The main controller 670 includes a distortion amount / weight conversion unit 776, a payout number counter 778, a weight information acquisition unit 779, and a weight / number conversion unit 780, which will be described in detail below. The distortion / weight conversion unit 776, the weight information acquisition unit 779, and the weight / number conversion unit 780 are stored in the ROM 672 as programs executed by the CPU 671 of the main control device 670.

  When inputting the detected value of the distortion amount output from the first distortion sensor 775A, the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 776 converts the total of the game balls accommodated in the first tray 715 corresponding to the detected value of the distortion amount. Convert to weight and output. When the distortion value / weight conversion unit 776 inputs the detected value of the distortion amount output from the second distortion sensor 775B, the game balls accommodated in the second tray 722 corresponding to the detected value of the distortion amount Converted to total weight and output. Note that the first strain sensor 775A, the second strain sensor 775B, and the strain amount / weight conversion unit 776 constitute a measuring unit 770 of the present embodiment.

  The first payout number counter 778A reads the rotation angle of the payout motor 732 when the first guide passage 782 is opened, which is detected by the rotation detection sensor 733, and reads the rotation angle from the rotation angle while the first guide passage 782 is open. Count the number of medals paid out. The second payout number counter 778B reads the rotation angle of the payout motor 732 when the second guide passage 783 is opened, which is detected by the rotation detection sensor 733, and reads the rotation angle from the rotation angle while the second guide passage 783 is open. Count the number of medals paid out. When counting the payout of the predetermined number of medals, the second payout number counter 778B outputs a signal indicating the payout of the predetermined number of medals. The predetermined number is, for example, ten.

  The weight information acquisition unit 779 acquires, as weight information, an average weight indicating an average weight of one medal based on the weight obtained by measuring the medals paid out by the payout device 688 by the second measuring unit 770B. Specifically, the weight information acquisition unit 779 receives a signal output when a predetermined number of medals are counted by the second payout number counter 778B, and stores the signal in the second tray 722 at the time of inputting the signal. Get the total weight of the medals to be played. The weight information acquisition unit 779 acquires the average weight of one medal by dividing the total weight by a predetermined number. The weight information acquisition unit 779 stores the acquired average weight in the RAM 673.

  In the present embodiment, the weight information acquisition unit 779 uses medals paid out by the payout device 688 and stored in the saucer device 715 in a bonus game in which medals are paid out more frequently than in a normal game state. To obtain weight information. Therefore, the weight information corresponding to the weight of one medal is obtained in a jackpot state in which a large amount of game balls are paid out at one time, and the accuracy of the weight information is as much as the weight information can be obtained from a large number of medals. Can be improved.

  The weight / number conversion unit 780 converts the weight of medals stored in the first tray 715 into the number of medals stored in the first tray 715 based on the average weight acquired by the weight information acquisition unit 779. . Specifically, the weight / number conversion unit 780 calculates the total weight of the medals stored in the first tray 715 output from the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 476 based on the average weight of one medal. The number is converted into the number of medals stored in the first tray 715 corresponding to the weight. The weight / number conversion unit 780 outputs the converted number of medals to the stored number display unit 781.

  The stored number display section 781 displays the number of medals stored in the first tray 715 output from the weight / number conversion section 780. Therefore, even if there is a variation in the weight between the weight of some medals paid out by the payout device 688 and the weight of other medals, the correct number of medals can be displayed continuously.

  Next, normal processing performed by the main control device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart illustrating the normal processing according to the tenth embodiment.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not a medal has been bet by operating the single bet button 661 or the max bet button 663. If a medal has been bet, the process proceeds to step S2002. If no medals have been bet, this process is repeated.

  In step S2002, it is determined whether the start lever 652 has been operated. If the start lever 652 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2003. If the start lever 652 has not been operated, this processing is repeated.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery performed due to the operation of the start lever 652 is a winning result such as a big bonus or a regular bonus. And the type of out-of-designs are determined.

  In step S2004, when each of the stop buttons 653 to 55 is pressed, a stop process for stopping each of the reels L, M, and R is performed. In step S2005, a payout process in which the payout device 688 pays out medals is executed. In step S2006, a special game state process such as a big bonus game or a regular bonus game is executed.

  Here, the medal payout process described above in step S2005 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether the credit has reached the upper limit. If the credit has not reached the upper limit, the number of credits is incremented by one and the number of payouts is incremented by one (step S2102). When the credit has not reached the upper limit, the medal cannot be actually paid out by the medal discharge mechanism 733. If the credit has reached the upper limit, the process advances to step S2103.

  In step S2103, since the credit has reached the upper limit, the payout device 688 actually pays out medals. In step S2104, the number of payouts is incremented by one.

  In step S2105, every time the medal discharging mechanism pays out one medal, the rotation angle of the payout motor 732 detected by the rotation detection sensor 733 is stored in the memory. Thus, the number of medals actually paid out by the payout device 688 can be stored. The stored number of medals is used for obtaining the average weight of medals.

  In step S2106, it is detected whether or not the payout of the number to be received for the winning combination has been completed. In step S2107, if the payout is completed, the payout by the payout device 688 is stopped, the present processing is terminated, and the process returns to the normal processing. If the payout has not been completed, the process returns to step S2103, and the processing from step S2103 is executed.

  Next, the guidance passage process, the calibration process, and the first tray accommodation number calculation process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing by the CPU 671. FIG. 111 is a flowchart illustrating the guidance path processing according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart illustrating the calibration process according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart illustrating the first tray accommodation number calculation process.

  In FIG. 110, the CPU 671 executes a timer interrupt process, for example, every 2 msec.

  In step S2111, the CPU 671 determines whether or not the bonus game flag is 1. The CPU 671 sets the bonus game flag to 1 when the result of the lottery by the lottery process described above is a predetermined winning result such as a big bonus or a regular bonus, and sets the bonus game flag to 0 when the bonus game is ended. If the bonus game flag is 1, the flow advances to step S2112 to execute a guidance passage process. If the bonus game flag is 0, the process ends.

  With reference to FIG. 111, a guide path process performed by the CPU 671 will be described.

  In step S2201, the CPU 671 drives the switching driver 759 to switch the passage switching member 758 from the first position 762 to the second position 763. This is for opening the second guide passage 783 communicating with the second tray 722. As a result, the medals paid out from the payout device 688 are guided to the second guide passage 783 and stored in the second tray 722.

  In step S2202, the CPU 671 stores a predetermined number of medals (for example, 10) in a storage area r of the RAM 673 described below in advance. In step S2203, the CPU 671 stores the number of medals guided to the second guiding passage 783 in the storage area s of the RAM 673. The number of medals guided to the second guide passage 783 is determined by reading the rotation angle of the payout motor 732 detected by the rotation detection sensor 733 after the passage switching member 758 is switched to the second position 762, and setting the rotation angle to 1 It can be obtained by dividing by the rotation angle required for discharging a medal.

  In step S2204, the CPU 671 performs an operation of r−s using the values of the storage areas r and s described above, and determines whether the operation result is 0. If it is 0, it indicates that the guidance of 10 medals has been completed, and the process advances to step S2205. If it is not 0, since the guidance of 10 medals has not been completed, the process returns to step S2203, and the processes of steps S2203 and S2204 are repeated until the number of guidance reaches 10.

  In step S2205, the CPU 671 gives an instruction to drive the switching drive unit 759 so that the passage switching member 758 switches from the second position 763 to the first position 762. That is, the switching drive unit 759 rotates the passage switching member 758 from the second position 763 to the first position 762 to open the first guide passage 782. Thereby, the medals paid out from the payout device 688 are guided to the first guide path 782 and stored in the first tray 715. Thus, the passage switching process is completed, and the process proceeds to the calibration process.

  Next, a calibration process performed by the CPU 671 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S2301, the distortion / weight conversion unit 776 of the CPU 671 reads a detection value (distortion amount) of the second distortion sensor 775B. In step S2302, the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 776 converts the read distortion amount into the total weight of medals stored in the second tray 722 at the time when the distortion amount is read. That is, the weight of ten medals is obtained.

  In step S2303, the weight information acquisition unit 779 of the CPU 671 stores the total weight of medals stored in the second tray 722 acquired in step S2302 in the storage area t of the RAM 673.

  In step S2304, t ÷ s is calculated using the value of the storage area s (the number of leads) obtained in step S2203 and the value of the storage area t described above, and the calculation result is obtained as the average weight of one medal. I do.

  In step S2305, the weight information acquisition unit 779 stores the average weight of one medal obtained in step S2304 in the storage area u of the RAM 673. Thus, the present process ends, and the process proceeds to the lower plate accommodation number calculation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a description will be given of the first tray accommodation number calculation process performed by the CPU 671.

  In step S2401, the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 776 of the CPU 671 reads a detection value (distortion amount) of the first distortion sensor 775A. In step S2402, the distortion amount / weight conversion unit 776 converts the read distortion amount into the total weight of medals stored in the first tray 715 at the time when the distortion amount is read.

  In step S2403, the weight / number conversion unit 780 of the CPU 671 stores the total weight of medals stored in the first tray 715 acquired in step S2402 in the storage area v of the RAM 673.

  In step S2404, the weight / number conversion unit 780 calculates v ÷ u using the value of the storage area u (the average weight of one medal) obtained in step S2306 and the value of the storage area v described above. . The calculation result is the number of medals stored in the first tray 715 when the distortion amount is read. In step S2405, the weight / number conversion unit 780 stores the number of medals stored in the first tray 715 in the display memory.

  In step S2406, the stored number display unit 781 displays the number of medals stored in the first tray 715, which is stored in the display memory. This ends the process.

  The above-mentioned hopper 686 corresponds to the dispensing unit of the present invention, the tray device 715A corresponds to the storing unit of the present invention, the measuring unit 770 corresponds to the measuring unit of the present invention, and the weight information acquisition unit 779. Corresponds to the obtaining unit of the present invention, the weight / number converting unit 780 corresponds to the converting unit of the present invention, and the accommodated number display unit 781 corresponds to the displaying unit of the present invention. Further, the first tray 715 corresponds to the first storage unit of the present invention, the second tray 722 corresponds to the second storage unit of the present invention, and the first measuring unit 770A is the first measuring unit of the present invention. And the second measurement unit 770B corresponds to a second measurement unit of the present invention.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 600 of the tenth embodiment, the hopper 686 that pays out medals having a predetermined value and the receiving device 715A that stores the medals that are paid out by the hopper 686 are provided in the receiving device 715A. A measuring unit 770 for measuring the weight of a medal to be used, and a weight information obtaining unit for obtaining weight information corresponding to the weight of one medal using the medal paid out by the hopper 686 and accommodated by the receiving device 715A. 779, and a weight / number conversion unit 780 that converts the weight of the medals stored in the receiving device 715A into the number of medals stored in the receiving device 715A based on the weight information obtained by the weight information obtaining unit 779. , A stored number display unit 7 for displaying the number of medals converted by the weight / number conversion unit 780 Comprising 1, (for example, correspond to the gaming machine described in C1 described above). According to such a configuration, in obtaining the weight information corresponding to the weight of one medal, the medals paid out by the hopper 686 and stored in the receiving device 715A are used. Weight information used for the conversion to is easily obtained. Based on the acquired weight information, the weight of the medals stored in the tray device 715A is converted into the number of medals stored in the tray device 715A, so that the number of medals stored in the tray device 715A is accurate. Required. Since the converted number of medals is displayed on the stored number display portion 781, the player can easily grasp the number of medals. Therefore, even during the game, it is easy to accurately grasp the number of medals stored in the tray device 715A.

Also, even if the weight of one medal changes during the period when the gaming machine is installed,
Since the weight information used for converting the weight of medals into the number of medals reflects the weight of one medal for the medals actually paid out from the hopper 686 and stored in the receiving device 715A, accurate The number of medals can be kept displayed.

  Further, the tray device 715A includes a first tray 715 for storing medals paid out by the hopper 686, and a second tray 722 for storing medals paid out by the hopper 686. The measuring unit 770 includes the first tray 715. And a second measurement unit 770B for measuring the weight of medals stored in the second tray 722. The weight information acquisition unit 779 includes a hopper The weight information is acquired using the medals paid out to the second tray 722 by the 686, and the weight / number conversion unit 780 determines the first tray based on the weight information acquired by the weight information acquisition unit 779. For converting the weight of medals stored in the first tray 715 into the number of medals stored in the first tray 715 Some (for example, correspond to the gaming machine according to C4 described above). According to such a configuration, the weight information used when the weight / number conversion unit 780 converts the weight of the medals stored in the first tray 715 into the number of medals is the second weight different from the first tray 715. Since it is obtained using the medals paid out to the receiving tray 722, even if it is difficult to obtain the weight information using the medals paid out to the first receiving tray 715, the second receiving tray 722 is used to obtain the weight information. Available for Therefore, even when it is difficult to obtain the weight information using the medals paid out to the first tray 715, the number of medals paid out to the first tray 715 can be accurately obtained.

  The weight information obtaining unit 779 obtains, as weight information, an average weight indicating the average weight of one medal based on the weight obtained by measuring the medals paid out by the hopper 686 with the second measuring unit 770B. The weight / number converter 780 stores the weight of the medals stored in the first tray 715 in the first tray 715 based on the average weight obtained by the weight information obtaining unit 780. (For example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in C5). According to such a configuration, the weight information corresponding to the weight of one medal is obtained as an average weight indicating the average weight of one medal based on the weight obtained by measurement by the second measuring unit 770B. Is done. Based on the average weight, the weight of the medals stored in the first tray 715 is converted into the number of medals stored in the first tray 715. Therefore, the weight information is obtained using the medals paid out to the first tray 715, despite the weight variation between the weight of some medals paid out by the hopper 686 and the weight of other medals. Even if it is difficult, it is possible to keep track of the exact number of medals.

  Further, the weight information acquisition unit 780 is paid out by the hopper 686 in the special game state (for example, a bonus game obtained by winning a big bonus) in which more medals are paid out than in the normal game state. The weight information is acquired using the medals stored in the second tray 722 (for example, corresponding to the gaming machine described in C6). According to such a configuration, when it is difficult to obtain the weight information using the medals paid out to the first tray 715, the weight information is obtained using the medals paid out to the second tray 722. Even in the special game state in which a large amount of medals are paid out at once, weight information can be acquired from a large number of medals, so that the accuracy of the weight information can be improved.

  The game apparatus further includes a stored number display unit 781 that displays the number of medals stored in the first tray 715 converted by the weight / number conversion unit 780 (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in C7 described above). Thereby, the player can check the number of medals displayed in the stored number display section 781 without confirming the medals stored in the first tray 715, and can display the medals in the first tray 715 even during the game. It becomes easy to accurately grasp the number of medals stored.

  In addition, the game device includes an effect execution unit that executes an effect according to the number of medals converted by the weight / number conversion unit 780 (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in C8 described above). Since the number of medals stored in the first tray 715 is accurately obtained, it is possible to execute an effect that accurately reflects the number of medals stored in the first tray 715.

  An eleventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a schematic front view of the slot machine 600A of the eleventh embodiment.

  In the tenth embodiment described above, the measuring unit 770 only measures the weight of the medals stored in the saucer device 715, but in the present embodiment, the measuring unit 770 performs the measurement of the weight in addition to the measurement of the weight. The force (pressure) applied by the operation is detected.

  The slot machine 600A of this embodiment includes a medal tray 618 and an ashtray 622 beside the medal tray 618. The medal tray 618 includes a measurement unit 770 including a distortion sensor 775.

  The distortion of the distortion sensor 775 increases in accordance with the weight of the medals paid out during the bonus game. That is, as the distortion increases, the output voltage also increases. Since the number of medals to be paid out is determined according to the winning combination, the output voltage generally increases gradually, although there is a slight difference in the magnitude of the change depending on the size of the winning combination.

  On the other hand, the force applied by the player's operation occurs independently of the payout of medals, and is larger than the weight of the medals to be paid out. For this reason, the change in the voltage output by the force applied by the operation of the player is steeper than the change in the output voltage due to the payout of medals. Therefore, for example, it is conceivable that the rate of change of the output voltage due to the payout of medals is obtained in advance as a threshold value, and when the rate of change of the output voltage exceeds this value, it is detected that the player's operation has been performed. .

  The operation of the player detected by the measurement unit 770 may be the operation of the effect button, or the operation of the ejection operation unit 435 or the guidance operation unit 453 as described in the first to third embodiments.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 600A of the eleventh embodiment, the measurement unit 770 that measures the weight of the medals stored in the tray device 715 can be used as a detection sensor such as an effect button. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of components due to attaching a separate sensor for each different measurement target, and to increase the installation space efficiency.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, but can be modified as follows.

  (1) In the first embodiment described above, the second discharge unit 421 is configured to discharge a predetermined number of game balls to the outside, but the second discharge unit 421 discharges an arbitrary number of game balls. A possible configuration may be added (for example, a modification of the gaming machine described in A12 described above).

  (2) In the first embodiment described above, the discharge of the game ball from the second discharge port 422 is configured to be automatically stopped. However, the discharge of the game ball from the second discharge port 422 is manually stopped. (For example, a modification of the gaming machine described in A13 described above). Since the player can confirm the discharge of the game balls on the discharge indicator 436, the discharge of the game balls can be stopped when a predetermined number of the game balls are discharged.

  (3) In the first embodiment described above, the discharge operation unit 435 is provided, but the discharge operation unit 435 is not provided, and the second discharge unit 421 starts discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 15. (For example, a modification of the gaming machine described in A14 described above). For example, a proximity sensor is provided near the opening of the second discharge port 422 located on the lower surface of the lower plate 15, and the proximity sensor detects the proximity sensor near the opening of the container that receives game balls discharged from the second discharge port 422. Section is provided. When this container is disposed below the second discharge port 422, the proximity sensor on the lower plate 15 side detects the presence of the detecting unit on the container side. The second discharging unit 421 may be configured to start discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 upon detection of this.

  (4) In the above-described first embodiment, the second payout unit 421 is configured to start discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 when the discharge operation unit 435 receives the operation of the player. However, the second payout unit 421 is configured to start discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 15 when the discharge operation unit 435 receives an operation of the player and a specific discharge condition is satisfied. It does not matter.

  That is, the second discharge unit 421 includes a discharge condition determination unit that determines whether a discharge condition that triggers the discharge of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 is satisfied. If the unit 435 receives the operation of the player and the discharge condition determination unit determines that the discharge condition is not satisfied, the discharge operation unit 435 does not discharge the game ball stored in the lower plate 15 and When the player's operation is performed and the discharge condition determination unit determines that the discharge condition is satisfied, the discharge of the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 is started (for example, the game described in A14 described above). Machine). According to such a configuration, if the player decides in advance to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 15 from the second discharge unit 421 by operating the discharge operation unit 435, the player can In addition, at the timing when it is determined that the discharge condition is satisfied, it is possible to receive the discharge of the game ball from the second discharge unit 421 without any operation.

  The above-mentioned “discharge condition that triggers the second discharge unit 421 to start discharging game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15” is, for example, such that the number of game balls paid out from the payout device 358 during the establishment of the big hit state is The number may reach a predetermined number, or the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 may reach a predetermined number. This is because the second discharge unit 421 is not operated when the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 is less than the number of discharges from the second discharge unit 421. Further, as another example, when a plurality of types of jackpot states having different numbers of rounds in which the jackpot state occurs are provided, a jackpot state of a certain number of rounds or more (for example, two or more rounds) occurs. When the number of rounds is low (for example, one round), the number of game balls paid out to the player is small. This is because the player may want to keep the game balls paid out in the jackpot state with a low round number in the lower plate 15. In addition, any condition related to some game may be used.

  (5) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the lower plate 15 and the auxiliary plate 451 are separately provided in the lower plate device 15A and the auxiliary plate device 451A. In this state, the lower plate device 15A provided on the front surface of the gaming machine main body 10E1 may be provided (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in B3 described above). For example, in this case, the outer wall of the lower plate device 15A is configured to cover the lower plate 15 and the auxiliary plate 451 in the fourth embodiment. According to such a configuration, since the lower plate 15 and the auxiliary plate 451 are provided in the lower plate device 15A in a divided state, the game balls to be paid out to the lower plate 15 and the game balls to be paid out to the auxiliary plate 451. It is difficult to mix in the lower plate device 15A. Therefore, during the game in which the game balls are paid out to the lower plate 15, even if the game balls required to be exchanged for the food and drink provided by the game hall are paid out to the auxiliary plate 451, the game medium is transferred to the auxiliary plate 451. The payout does not hinder the progress of the game.

  (6) In the above-described fifth embodiment, the payout device 358 pays out the game balls to the auxiliary plate 451 based on the discharge operation unit 435 receiving the operation of the player. A configuration may be adopted in which game balls are paid out to the auxiliary plate 451 upon receiving an operation and based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit state). That is, the guide path unit 450 includes a guide condition determination unit that determines whether a guide condition that triggers a game ball to the auxiliary plate 422 is satisfied, and the guide path unit 450 is configured such that the guide operation unit 453 operates the player. When the guidance condition determination unit determines that the guidance condition is not satisfied, the guiding operation unit 453 does not guide the game ball to the lower plate 15, and the guidance operation unit 453 receives the operation of the player and the guidance condition determination unit When it is determined that the guidance condition is satisfied, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary plate 451 (for example, corresponds to the gaming machine described in B7 described above).

  In such a configuration, the guidance condition determination unit is stored in the ROM 512 as a guidance condition determination processing program executed by the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311. In order for the payout control device 311 to recognize the start of the big hit state, the payout control device 311 is configured to input a command for notifying the occurrence of the big hit state from the main control device 261. For example, if a command output from the main control device 261 to the display control device 45 and displayed on the first symbol display device 42 to notify the start of the big hit state is also output to the payout control device 311. , The payout control device 311 can recognize the start of the jackpot state.

  According to such a configuration, if the player determines in advance that the guiding passage unit 450 guides the game ball to the auxiliary plate 422 by operating the guiding operation unit 453, the player can determine whether the guiding condition is satisfied. At the timing determined to be established, the game medium can be guided to the auxiliary plate 422 without any operation.

  Here, in the case of a general pachinko machine, in order to start discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate, the members such as the ball release lever 17 are operated, but the ball is stored in the lower plate. Even if the game ball is grasped by hand and taken out, some kind of work by the player is required at the start of ejection. On the other hand, in the second discharge unit 421, if the player operates the discharge operation unit 435 in advance, no operation is required at the timing when the discharge condition is satisfied, and the second discharge unit 421 does not require any operation. Discharge of game balls can be started. Therefore, when the player wants to discharge the game ball from the second discharge unit 421 during the game, for example, even when the player wants to exchange the game ball stored in the lower plate 15 for food and drink provided by the game hall, the player can play the game. Of the game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 without hindering the progress of the game.

  Some examples of the aforementioned “guidance conditions” include, for example, that the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 358 to the lower plate 15 during the establishment of the big hit state besides the occurrence of the big hit state. Also, when the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 reaches a predetermined number, or when a plurality of types of jackpots having different numbers of rounds in which a jackpot occurs occurs, a predetermined type of jackpot occurs. (For example, if the maximum value that the player can acquire during the special game state is different, a jackpot state in which a certain value or more is obtained) or a jackpot state of a type set by the player The condition may be any condition related to a game, such as occurrence of a game.

  (7) In the above-described seventh and tenth embodiments, the weight information acquisition units 479 and 779 are game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15 (in the case of the weight information acquisition unit 779, the second tray 722. The same applies hereinafter). The weight of one game ball is obtained by dividing the total weight of the weight information acquisition unit 779 (meaning a medal; the same applies hereinafter) by the number of game balls accommodated in the lower plate 15. The method of obtaining the weight of one game ball is not limited to this, and the method of determining the average weight of one game ball by taking the value located at the center from the weight of the plurality of game balls, A method may be used in which the value that appears most frequently from among the weights of the game machines is the average weight of one game ball (for example, a modification of the game machine described in C2 and C5 described above).

  (8) In Embodiments 8 and 9 described above, the effect mode determination unit 579 uses the load detected by the load detection unit 570 to set a predetermined effect mode, such as a jackpot display effect or a chance effect, for the player. Although determined according to the tendency, the load detection unit 570 may be provided at a portion other than the lower plate 15, for example, at the upper plate 19 to detect the load of the player's hand on the upper plate 19. Further, a configuration other than the load detection unit 570, for example, a capacitance switch such as a touch sensor is provided on the edge of the lower plate 15 to detect whether or not the player's hand is placed on the lower plate 15. Is also good. By detecting something other than the load, the predetermined effect form may be determined according to the tendency of the player.

  (9) In Embodiment 8 described above, the effect mode determination unit 579 determines the tendency of the player by using the temporal change of the load of the game ball detected by the load detection unit 570. The tendency of the player may be determined using information other than the temporal change of the load of the ball. That is, the lower plate 15 is provided with a discharge operation means such as a ball release lever 17 and a discharge operation means for switching between a housed state and a discharge state by turning on / off a button. As a result, the lower plate 15 changes between a storage state in which the game balls are easily stored and a discharge state in which the game balls are easily discharged to the outside. The predetermined production mode determined by the performance mode determination unit 579 is determined based on whether the lower plate 15 is in the accommodated state or the discharged state (for the gaming machine described in (D12) described above). Correspondence). When the lower plate 15 is set in a storage state in which game balls are easily stored by a player's operation, it is understood that the player tends to store game balls in the lower plate 15. When the lower plate 15 is in a discharge state in which the game balls are easily discharged by the operation of the player, it is understood that the player tends to discharge the game balls immediately without storing the game balls in the lower plate 15. As described above, based on whether the lower plate 15 is in the accommodated state or the discharged state, the predetermined effect mode executed on the second symbol display device 41 becomes a mode suitable for the player. It is determined. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the predetermined effect executed in a manner recognized by the player.

  The detection of whether the lower plate 15 is in the accommodated state or the discharged state is performed by, for example, a discharge operation means such as the ball release lever 17 when the ball release lever 17 is switched to the discharge state. It is conceivable that a signal indicating that the lower plate 15 is in the discharge state is output to the effect mode determination unit 579. Further, if the discharging operation means switches between the housed state and the discharging state by turning on / off the button, when the button is turned on and the discharging operation is performed, a signal indicating that the lower plate 15 is in the discharging state is determined. It is conceivable to configure so as to output to the unit 579.

  (10) In Example 10 described above, the weight information obtaining unit obtains weight information using medals paid out by the hopper 686 and accommodated in the tray device 715A during the bonus game at the time of winning the big bonus. However, the weight information may be paid out by the hopper 686 in other states and the weight information may be obtained using the stored medals in the medal tray. For example, in a lending state in which medals are paid out when an operation for renting out medals is performed, weight information may be acquired using medals paid out by the hopper 686 and stored in the medal tray (for example, A modification of the gaming machine described in C3 described above). According to such a configuration, when a medal is lent at the start of the game, the medal tray is in a state in which no medal is stored. Therefore, the number of medals paid out to the medal tray can be easily detected without providing the configuration for switching the medal guiding path as in the tenth embodiment (that is, even with the configuration having only one medal tray). In addition, at least once a day, medals are lent out in a state where no medals are stored in the medal tray. Therefore, even if the configuration for switching the medal guiding path as in the tenth embodiment is not provided, calibration is not required. Can be performed periodically.

  (11) The present invention may be applied to various (for example, first and third type) game machines, and may be applied to pachinko machines and the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine which enters a special game state on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state when a ball enters a predetermined winning opening. Further, in addition to the pachinko machines, various game machines such as slot machines, arranged ball-type pachinko machines, sparrow balls, game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, and the like may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol valid line is determined by inserting a coin, and a symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. is there. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "variable display means for variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming and displaying the symbols is provided, and the symbol is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). Is started, and the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the fixed symbol at the time of the stop is the specific symbol. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player "as a necessary condition. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of game media.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a variable display means for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Some are not provided. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of game balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, a symbol change starts due to an operation of an operation lever, for example, due to an operation of a stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a jackpot state advantageous to the player is generated on condition that the final symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the lower tray is provided to the player. A large number of balls are paid out.

    (12) Regarding the various inventions disclosed in this specification, it should be noted that various combinations of all the constituent elements are possible, and the invention can be independently established without any other constituent elements.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

15 ... lower plate (storage means, first storage means)
358… payout device (payout means)
411: First discharge unit (first discharge means)
412: 1st discharge port (1st discharge part)
421... Second discharge unit (second discharge means)
422: second discharge port (second discharge section)
433… rotation detection sensor (discharge detection means)
434… Discharge ball count switch (discharge detection means)
435... Discharge operation unit (discharge operation means)
450… Guidance passage unit (guidance means)
451 Auxiliary plate (second storage means)
453… Guidance operation button (guidance operation means)
454: Upper plate guiding passage (first guiding passage)
455… lower plate guiding passage (first guiding passage)
456… Auxiliary dish guide path (second guide path)
457… passage switching mechanism (switching section)
479… weight information acquisition unit (acquisition means)
480 ... weight / number conversion unit (conversion means)
481… lower part ball number display part (display means)
686… Hopper (payout means)
715: first tray (first storage means)
722... Second tray (second storage means)
770 ... Measuring unit (measuring means)
770A: First measuring unit (first measuring means)
770B ... second measuring unit (second measuring means)
779 ... weight information acquisition unit (acquisition means)
780: weight / number conversion unit (conversion means)
781... Stored number display section (display means)

Claims (1)

A payout means for paying out game media having a predetermined value,
A first accommodating means for accommodating a game medium paid out by the paying means in a state in which the game medium can be visually recognized by a player;
A second accommodating unit provided separately from the first accommodating unit and accommodating the game medium to be paid out by the paying unit in a state that is distinguishable from the game medium accommodated in the first accommodating unit and is visible to a player; Means,
A portion of the game media to be paid out during the special game state in which the player can obtain a greater number of game medium payout opportunities than in the normal game state is guided to the second accommodation means, and the special A guiding means for guiding remaining game media among the game media paid out during the gaming state to the first storage means.

Images